Update the list of supported language environments.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d874e913 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-08-14
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
83b6997f
GM
34* When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
35file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
36
d7b38c05 37** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 38added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
39Postscript files are included.
40
41** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
42`dired-ref.tex'.
43
25ad1371
GM
44** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
45expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
46
47This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
48determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
49mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
50interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
51regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
52associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
53
424d8b44 54+++
f0298744
DL
55** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
56displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
57menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
58menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
59
9a8d84ca
DL
60** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
61a version-dependent component.
62
d76c03ea
GM
63** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
64Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
65will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
66character is still bound as before.
67
3b4fa1b2
DL
68** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
69using that menu.
70
40e857ea 71** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 72suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 73
beb2eb00 74+++
c08398de
DL
75** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
76buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
77contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
78by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
79insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
80the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
81Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
82
db7a3ede 83+++
3d6cd763
GM
84** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
85coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
86escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
87such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
88recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 89always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 90read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
91(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
92RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 93
0b8a3a6d
DL
94** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
95environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
96
424d8b44 97+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
98** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
99point in a pop-up window.
100
6d35b49f 101+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
102** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
103displays all characters in that character set.
104
105** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
106coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
107
a4067978 108+++
5cb6a58e 109** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
110on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
111defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 112
424d8b44 113+++
a1b8d58b
GM
114** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
115
6e417ca5
DL
116** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
117been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
118
424d8b44 119+++
5898e075
DL
120** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
121`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
122indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
123indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
124
424d8b44 125+++
abfcc168
GM
126** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
127sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 128(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
129You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
130
424d8b44 131+++
cc181e95
GM
132** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
133on the display using several methods
134
424d8b44 135+++
cc181e95
GM
136- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
137a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
138be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
139
424d8b44 140+++
cc181e95
GM
141- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
142equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
143
da4496b6 144- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
145
146- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
147the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
148
424d8b44 149+++
3b4fa1b2 150** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 151an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 152command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 153does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 154
424d8b44 155+++
176256a1 156** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
157`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
158typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 159
dd0add8e
DL
160** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
161characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
162
bf3ba9ac 163+++
699238d9
GM
164** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
165compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
166this behavior.
167
168The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
169compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
170Emacs dump core.
171
424d8b44 172+++
699238d9 173** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 174
7233c5bd
GM
175*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
176whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
177is useful for debugging X problems.
178
179Example:
180
699238d9 181 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 182
100b3cbb
GM
183*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
184visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
185the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
186and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
187visual class names are
188
189 TrueColor
190 PseudoColor
191 DirectColor
192 StaticColor
193 GrayScale
194 StaticGray
195
196Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
197`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
198meaning.
199
200The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
201supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
202`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
203visual.
204
205Example:
206
699238d9 207 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
208
209*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
210specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
211default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
212resource values are `true' or `on'.
213
214Example:
215
699238d9 216 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 217
0d0c76b8
EZ
218** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
219more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
220now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
221
42088c12 222** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 223display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
224shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
225be customized.
c60ea02e 226
424d8b44 227+++
31047e0d
DL
228** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
229
424d8b44 230+++
b02786f9
GM
231** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
232all frames except the selected one.
233
3261c1d8
DL
234** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
235to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
236
ffe36136 237** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
238the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
239MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
240displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
241
0292b49f 242+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
243** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
244MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 245
559cee90
DL
246** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
247read mail from the menu etc.
248
480b5773 249+++
271b4185
GM
250** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
251a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
252
0daee095
GM
253** Changes in Texinfo mode.
254
255** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
256macros
257
258 Key binding Macro
259 -------------------------
260 C-c C-c C-s @strong
261 C-c C-c C-e @emph
262 C-c C-c u @url
263 C-c C-c q @quotation
264 C-c C-c m @email
265
559cee90
DL
266** Changes in Outline mode.
267
268There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
269`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
270the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
271
7a912f63
GM
272** Changes to Emacs Server
273
c0a8c108
EZ
274+++
275*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
276with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
277are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
278Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
279buffers to kill, as before.
280
281Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 282i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
283this way.
284
956777b3
GM
285** Changes to Show Paren mode.
286
287*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
288The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
289use. Default is 1000.
290
f6989277 291+++
404fa7d6
DL
292** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
293groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
294
424d8b44
DL
295+++
296** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
297M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
298M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
299buffers.
8964fec7 300
424d8b44 301+++
39783d73
WP
302** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
303under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
304.emacs file.
305
306The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
307determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
308
d35fce81
GM
309** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
310abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
311`directory-abbrev-alist'.
312
a933dad1
DL
313** Faces and frame parameters.
314
315There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
316Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
317`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
318`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
319sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
320for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
321parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
322
323Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
324`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 325`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
326`default' face and vice versa.
327
d80061fa 328+++
f77a4a8a
GM
329** New face `menu'.
330
331The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
332Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
333attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
334
424d8b44 335+++
a933dad1
DL
336** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
337
338The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
339colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
340correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
341the screen gamma of a frame's display.
342
343PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
344in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
345color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
346
347The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
348`ScreenGamma'.
349
350** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
351
352The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
353Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
354oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
355of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
356the text.
357
358** Emacs has a new face implementation.
359
360The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
361font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
362height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
363These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
364specify a font.
365
366Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
367These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
368under Lisp changes, below.
369
370** New default font is Courier 12pt.
371
424d8b44
DL
372+++
373** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
374of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
375otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
376
377** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
378truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
379foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
380customizing face `fringe'.
381
382** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
383can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
384
385** LessTif support.
386
424d8b44
DL
387Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
388You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
389
390** Toolkit scroll bars.
391
392Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
393LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
394configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
395bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
396bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
397Emacs.
398
399When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
400Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
401Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
402Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
403define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
404`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
405
406Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
407a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
408directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
409different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
410system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
411add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
412
413The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
414`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
415This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
416image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
417Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
418
419** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
420
421When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
422widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
423Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
424
424d8b44 425+++
a933dad1
DL
426** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
427
428When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
429whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
430defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
431highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
432displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
433whitespace.
434
6e612d4d 435+++
a933dad1
DL
436** Busy-cursor.
437
438Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
439display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
440
424d8b44 441+++
a933dad1
DL
442** Blinking cursor
443
444M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
445terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
446and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
447the group `cursor'.
448
449** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
450
451This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
452generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
453See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
454details.
455
456Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
457have to do anything to activate it.
458
459** Tabs and variable-width text.
460
461Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
462defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
463independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
464Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
465
466** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
467
424d8b44 468+++
a933dad1
DL
469*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
470
471 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
472
79dd1637
RS
473The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
474LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 475
79dd1637
RS
476*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
477LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 478
34d90e29 479+++
a933dad1
DL
480** Hscrolling in C code.
481
cc181e95
GM
482Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
483`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
484customized.
a933dad1
DL
485
486** Tool bar support.
487
488Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
489how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
490
424d8b44 491+++
a933dad1
DL
492** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
493
494Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
495mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
496line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
497about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
498in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
499
500Currently, the following actions have been defined:
501
502- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
503buffers.
504
505- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
506M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
507
508- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
509
424d8b44
DL
510- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
511`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
512
513- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
514
515** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
516
517When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 518from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
519non-nil.
520
521** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
522
523Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
524Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
525the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
526italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
527Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
528attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
529on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
530
531** Sound support
532
2f516940 533Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 534driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 535supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 536
424d8b44 537+++
a933dad1
DL
538** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
539the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
540forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
541value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
542users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
543even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
544
545The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
546
0e18b431 547+++
a933dad1
DL
548** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
549
550As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
551drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
552`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
553
fdd8bb68 554+++
a933dad1
DL
555** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
556bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
557
558This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
559`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
560variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
561
562** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
563
564When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
565value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
566number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
567fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
568
569When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
570value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
571number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
572fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
573
574** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
575notably at the end of lines.
576
577All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
578spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
579
424d8b44 580+++
eee54b0e
DL
581There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
582
a933dad1
DL
583** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
584query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
585after each match to get the replacement text.
586
00782214 587+++
d5483ab1
GM
588** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
589you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 590
424d8b44 591** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
592you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
593lisp-complete-symbol.
594
7af69644 595+++
a933dad1
DL
596** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
597
163ea954
RS
598If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
599longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
600it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
601window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
602
603- User option: max-mini-window-height
604
605Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
606fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
607specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
608
609Default is 0.25.
610
2f72fd2f
GM
611** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
612
0d43b60d
GM
613** Changes to hideshow.el
614
615Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
616selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
617
618*** Generalized block selection and traversal
619
620A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
621(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
622which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
623`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
624point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
625(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
626
627If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
628i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
629backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
630the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
631
632*** Isearch support for updating mode line
633
634During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
635blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
636line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
637portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
638is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
639
640To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
641something like this in your .emacs.
642
643 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
644 (lambda ()
645 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
646
559cee90
DL
647** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
648
424d8b44 649+++
559cee90
DL
650If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
651entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
652log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
653
424d8b44 654+++
559cee90 655New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
424d8b44
DL
656buffer.
657
658+++
659New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries in
660a log file.
eb2aac9d 661
502004be 662+++
eb2aac9d
GM
663Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
664if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
665
502004be 666+++
424d8b44
DL
667Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
668version number is performed based on regular expressions from
669`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
670Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 671
3476b54a
GM
672** Changes in Font Lock
673
674*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
675font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
676mode.
677
b3b98592
GM
678** Comint (subshell) changes
679
66b6c480
MB
680By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
681distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
682the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
683attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
684Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
685boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
686To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
687`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
688
b3b98592
GM
689Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
690and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
691
692The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
693buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
694buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
695
696The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
697M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
698the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
699
8c1bec7c
MB
700Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
701now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
702previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
703user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 704
e26cec67
GM
705** Changes to Rmail mode
706
c0510d27
GM
707*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
708set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
709receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
710recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
711`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
712as correspondent.
713
714Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
715mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 716regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 717
3b55acc9
GM
718*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
719to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
720Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
721with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
722for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
723
6a1950ec
GM
724*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
725like `j'.
726
5bb6f079
RS
727*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
728specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 729digest message.
e26cec67 730
993d8b7d
DL
731*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
732in which folder to put messages automatically.
733
400a1ed0
GM
734** Changes to TeX mode
735
736The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
737`latex-mode'.
738
a933dad1
DL
739** Changes to RefTeX mode
740
741*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
742 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
743 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
744 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
745 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
746 can be edited from that buffer.
747
748*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
749 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
750 `A' to use all marked entries).
751
752*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
753 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
754
755*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
756 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
757 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
758 been cited.
759
38de9631
GM
760** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
761The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
762semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
763in column 1 are always made leaves.
764
a933dad1
DL
765** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
766has the following new features:
767
768*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
769may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
770to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
771time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
772
773*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
774feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
775file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
776compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
777pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
778defaults to 1.
779
5d94f558 780** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
781file names.
782
424d8b44 783+++
a933dad1
DL
784** Tooltips.
785
786Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
787mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
788can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
789
790Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
791variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
792the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
793tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
794
424d8b44 795+++
a933dad1
DL
796** Customize changes
797
798*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
799`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
800cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
801
802*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
803Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
804default).
805
0ae51efb
GM
806*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
807between custom options. Example:
808
809 (defcustom default-input-method nil
810 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
811 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
812 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
813 :group 'mule
814 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
815 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
816
817This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
818current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
819first in a custom-set-variables statement.
820
a933dad1
DL
821** New features in evaluation commands
822
5e03eb84 823*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
824modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
825print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
826customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
827eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
828
5e03eb84
GM
829*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
830code when called with a prefix argument.
831
ead53494
GM
832** Ispell changes
833
37d8a691 834+++
bbe15990
EZ
835*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
836transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
837spell-checks the current buffer.
838
37d8a691 839+++
385ff9e3
GM
840*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
841added.
842
843*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
844correction is made and re-checked.
845
74ec6045 846*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
847
848*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
849cases.
850
851*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
852on syntax errors.
853
854*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
855end of the buffer.
856
a933dad1
DL
857** Dired changes
858
859*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
860command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
861is, delete only empty directories.
862
863*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
864command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
865copy directories recursively.
866
f6737cde
GM
867*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
868in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
869the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
870
2f72fd2f
GM
871*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
872replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
873directory.
874
7381ae05
MB
875*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
876a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
877This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
878will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
879accurate or inaccurate as it is.
880
e024b101
GM
881*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
882from ls switches.
883
a933dad1
DL
884** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
885use the -f option when sending mail.
886
b1c609b1
GM
887** CC mode changes.
888
889Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
890current user setups (although it's believed that these
891incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
892However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
893back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
894compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
895release.
896
7972fcfc
GM
897*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
898This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
899of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
900non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
901want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
902have to bother.
903
904Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
905situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 906and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
907If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
908the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
909by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
910
b1c609b1
GM
911*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
912When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
913variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
914take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
915is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
916settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
917possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
918Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
919
920By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
921special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
922the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
923of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
924above.
925
926Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
927when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
928function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
929call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
930then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
931values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
932only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
933function documentation for more info.
934
935The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
936especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
937with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
938intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
939such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
940is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
941configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
942global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
943
944(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
945
946**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
947This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
948
949This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
950variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
951completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
952the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
953empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
954style system.
955
956**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
957In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
958c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
959as far as possible.
960
961*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
962CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
963surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
964chapter about this in the manual.
965
966**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
967The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
968recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
969primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
970adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
971
972**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
973This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
974c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
975
976**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
977This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
978
979It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
980Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
981A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
982inside CC Mode.
983
984Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
985causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
986the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
987available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
988cc-mode/).
989
990**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
991The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
992specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
993literals.
994
995**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
996It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
997prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
998you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
999this function.
1000
1001*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1002It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1003to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1004struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1005Thanks to Eric Eide.
1006
1007*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1008It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1009opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1010
1011**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1012
1013*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1014See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1015better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1016and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1017
1018*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1019previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1020the column specified by comment-column.
1021
1022*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1023In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1024is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1025prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1026contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1027don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1028
1029*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1030instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1031arguments.
1032
1033*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1034
1035*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1036c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1037c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1038variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1039Provan).
1040
1041*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1042
c407c570
GM
1043** Makefile mode changes
1044
1045*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1046
5d94f558 1047*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1048Fontlock mode is active.
1049
87be76f6
GM
1050** Isearch changes
1051
3353ef5a
GM
1052*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1053so that searches can be resumed.
1054
1055*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1056respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1057that started the search.
1058
87be76f6 1059*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1060selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1061
c8a8458a 1062+++
87be76f6
GM
1063*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1064
d35fce81 1065Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1066`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1067search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1068before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1069highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1070`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1071
1072The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1073will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1074Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1075using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1076usual snappy response.
1077
1078If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1079matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1080set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1081isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1082
21bc6203 1083+++
35384f06
GM
1084** Changes in sort.el
1085
1086The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1087as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1088new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1089numeric base.
87be76f6 1090
d7b511c4
GM
1091** Changes to Ange-ftp
1092
424d8b44 1093+++
d7b511c4 1094*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1095names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1096sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1097
d7b511c4
GM
1098*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1099ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1100
9d453139
SS
1101*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1102output ^M at the end of lines.
1103
4b9347b3
GM
1104** Shell script mode changes.
1105
1106Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1107derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1108sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1109
79214ddf
FP
1110** Etags changes.
1111
1112*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1113
aca0be23 1114*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1115possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1116{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1117This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1118a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1119
79214ddf
FP
1120*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1121declarations when given the --declarations option.
1122
1123*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1124"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1125
1126*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1127types.
1128
de370c4c 1129*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1130
1131*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1132
1133*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1134are now tagged.
1135
1136*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1137variables are tagged.
1138
1139*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1140
8dc78b52
FP
1141*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1142for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1143
c8d94f86 1144+++
f6737cde
GM
1145** Changes in etags.el
1146
3f6e4b8b
GM
1147*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1148tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1149is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1150
f6737cde
GM
1151*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1152the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1153
1154If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1155FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1156TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1157obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1158
1159TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1160
1161FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1162List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1163
1164A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1165
1166 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1167 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1168 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1169
1170*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1171of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1172
1173*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1174names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1175
424d8b44 1176+++
fbc164de
PE
1177** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1178and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1179LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1180
0b8a3a6d
DL
1181** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1182Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
11838859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1184There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1185
424d8b44 1186+++
163ea954 1187** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1188remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1189appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1190
1191** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1192
424d8b44 1193+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1194** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1195
c0510d27
GM
1196** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1197containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1198expression from that list, are not checked.
1199
5d94f558
SS
1200** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1201When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1202and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1203the buffer, just like for the local files.
1204
dc28878c
GM
1205** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1206
a933dad1
DL
1207** New modes and packages
1208
ff332647 1209+++
90cbf47e
GM
1210*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1211intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1212typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1213on certain projects.
1214
1215*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1216regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1217
d96d6bb0 1218 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1219
1220will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1221face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1222typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1223Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1224appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1225current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1226corresponding file is read.
1227
424d8b44 1228+++
d96d6bb0 1229*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1230Emacs is idle.
1231
31fc5d15
GM
1232*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1233parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1234
5cb6a58e
SM
1235*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1236package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1237be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1238
424d8b44 1239+++
578979ee
GM
1240*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1241facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1242separate Texinfo file.
1243
424d8b44
DL
1244+++
1245*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1246by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1247provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1248`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1249enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1250
424d8b44 1251+++
6abca616
EZ
1252*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1253without invoking external programs.
1254
1255The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1256and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1257`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1258is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1259Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1260
1261The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1262page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1263
5e5dff44
GM
1264*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1265authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1266
1267The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1268the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1269the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1270Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1271even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1272single step.
1273
1274On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1275matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1276probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1277contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1278
424d8b44 1279+++
f7136ee8
GM
1280*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1281unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1282actually modifying content of a buffer.
1283
bbd9b566
GM
1284*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1285PostScript.
1286
1287Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1288
1289The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1290
1291 ; comment (until end of line)
1292 A non-terminal
1293 "C" terminal
1294 ?C? special
1295 $A default non-terminal
1296 $"C" default terminal
1297 $?C? default special
1298 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1299 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1300 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1301 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1302 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1303 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1304 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1305 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1306 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1307 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1308 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1309 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1310 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1311 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1312 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1313
1314Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1315
99453a38
GM
1316*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1317align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1318determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1319example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1320equal signs of assignments.
1321
424d8b44 1322+++
559cee90
DL
1323*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1324paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1325
424d8b44 1326+++
6448a6b3
GM
1327*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1328list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1329buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1330customize the package.
1331
6344985d
GM
1332*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1333
249652b1
GM
1334*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1335replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1336is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1337and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1338not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1339which answers different needs.
1340
424d8b44 1341+++
3476b54a
GM
1342*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1343suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1344expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1345course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1346reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1347to be enabled.
1348
424d8b44 1349+++
8964fec7
SM
1350*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1351containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1352
424d8b44 1353+++
a933dad1
DL
1354*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1355
424d8b44 1356+++
a933dad1
DL
1357*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1358
1359*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1360
1361*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1362Pascal) language.
1363
1364*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1365the text at point.
1366
1367*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1368
424d8b44 1369+++
8d54eb69
DL
1370*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1371
a933dad1
DL
1372*** whitespace.el ???
1373
ebcfda83
GM
1374*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1375files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1376(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1377interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1378often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1379uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1380codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1381
1382*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1383
1384Here is an example of columns:
1385
1386horse apple bus
1387dog pineapple car EXTRA
1388porcupine strawberry airplane
1389
1390Doing the following settings:
1391
1392 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1393 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1394 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1395 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1396
1397
1398Selecting the lines above and typing:
1399
1400 M-x delimit-columns-region
1401
1402It results:
1403
1404[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1405[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1406[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1407
1408delim-col has the following options:
1409
1410 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1411 before all columns.
1412
1413 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1414 between each column.
1415
1416 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1417 after all columns.
1418
1419 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1420 each column.
1421
1422delim-col has the following commands:
1423
1424 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1425 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1426
424d8b44 1427+++
f507826c 1428*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1429were operated on recently.
1430
1431M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1432
31fc5d15
GM
1433M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1434recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1435
31fc5d15
GM
1436M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1437filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1438file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1439
31fc5d15
GM
1440- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1441- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1442- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1443
31fc5d15
GM
1444The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1445dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1446
8062f458
DL
1447*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1448text.
1449
424d8b44 1450+++
36e24b82 1451*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1452of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1453specific to Message mode.
1454
424d8b44 1455+++
36e24b82
DL
1456*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1457viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1458with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1459
424d8b44 1460+++
aaa659ef
DL
1461*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1462interface to access directory servers using different directory
1463protocols. It has a separate manual.
1464
eee54b0e
DL
1465*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1466for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1467
424d8b44 1468+++
612839b6
GM
1469*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1470
5d94f558 1471*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1472minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1473
399da7e3
DL
1474*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1475with the diary features.
1476
6e417ca5
DL
1477*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1478numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1479
4a27bdfb
GM
1480*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1481Fill mode.
1482
a933dad1
DL
1483** Withdrawn packages
1484
1485*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1486functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1487
3261c1d8
DL
1488*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1489
1490*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1491
1492\f
1493* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1494(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1495
424d8b44
DL
1496+++
1497** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1498is running in batch mode. For example,
1499
1500 (message "%s" (read t))
1501
1502will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1503to standard output.
1504
1505+++
1506** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1507`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1508
ead53494
GM
1509** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1510will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1511frame or window.
1512
27848c01
GM
1513** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1514were added
1515
1516- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1517
1518Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1519a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1520
1521- Function: remq ELT LIST
1522
1523Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1524comparison is done with `eq'.
1525
1526** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1527
b548072f
GM
1528** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1529has been changed.
1530
424d8b44 1531+++
07b14857
KH
1532** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1533without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1534convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1535
9662da0b
GM
1536** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1537or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1538
7fce7efb
DL
1539** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1540function was declared obsolete.
1541
5d94f558 1542** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1543retained as an alias).
1544
f98d3086
SM
1545** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1546It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1547is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1548
87efd256
GM
1549** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1550
1551- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1552
1553Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1554MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1555
67c9a1d2
GM
1556** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1557
1558- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1559
1560Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1561
1562This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1563calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1564argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1565value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1566returned.
1567
1568Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1569if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1570it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1571minibuffer even if it is active.
1572
1573Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1574counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1575too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1576and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1577`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1578entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1579
1580ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1581ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1582ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1583ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1584ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1585If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1586Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1587
ead53494
GM
1588** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1589event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1590argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1591
25fa6deb
GM
1592** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1593call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1594message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1595Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1596
5d94f558 1597** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1598meaning no limit.
1599
5d94f558 1600** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1601coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1602DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1603
80c05bd3 1604** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1605of a primitive.
1606
80c05bd3
DL
1607** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1608buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1609This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1610than replacing the local map.
1611
4bc7a543
DL
1612** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1613after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1614
1615** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1616
f0298744
DL
1617** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1618promised long ago.
1619
5d94f558 1620** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1621\f
1622* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1623
1624Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1625--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1626When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1627so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1628
85c75536
MB
1629*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1630buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1631the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1632restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1633
0b8a3a6d
DL
1634*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1635`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1636when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1637multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1638
1639*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1640`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1641contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1642
1643*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1644changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1645[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1646regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1647the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1648extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1649bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1650eight-bit-graphic.
1651
1652** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1653
1654A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1655a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1656character set as previously.
1657
1658*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1659They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1660modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1661
1662CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1663characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1664range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1665case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1666
1667FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1668name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1669
1670*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1671registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1672"fontset-default".
1673
1674*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1675argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1676
1677** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1678composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1679buffers and strings.
1680
1681*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1682character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1683code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1684have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1685composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1686composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1687The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1688also been deleted.
1689
1690*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1691specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1692`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1693
1694*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1695MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1696composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1697may differ between buffer and string text.
1698
1699*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1700COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1701
1702*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1703directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1704Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1705`composition' from STRING.
1706
1707*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1708a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1709
1710*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1711obsolete.
1712
1713** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1714Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1715character set is not used.
1716
1717** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1718`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1719X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1720
1721+++
1722** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1723are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 17240xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1725
399da7e3 1726+++
f0124b4a
DL
1727** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1728that offset in the file before writing.
1729
f98d3086
SM
1730** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1731compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1732
612839b6
GM
1733** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1734`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1735from which the command was issued.
1736
1737** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1738`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1739`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1740additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1741operate on.
1742
271b4185
GM
1743** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1744to `window-buffer-height'.
1745
1746- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1747
1748Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1749The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1750lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1751
1752Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1753respectively.
1754
1755If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1756COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1757
1758The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1759obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1760on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1761
1762Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1763buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1764possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1765is currently displayed in some window.
1766
3c30cb6e
DL
1767** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1768argument function's results.
1769
62f20204
GM
1770** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1771signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1772
c0510d27
GM
1773** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1774header is the list of headers passed to it.
1775
1776** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1777ignores differences in case and text representation.
1778
1779** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1780cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1781as follows:
1782
1783 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1784 nil don't display a cursor
1785 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1786 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1787 others display a box cursor.
1788
9a0dd3dc
GM
1789** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1790an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1791defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1792set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1793
d7b511c4 1794** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1795specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1796the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1797text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1798
1799Example:
1800
1801 (string-to-syntax "()")
1802 => (4 . 41)
1803
1fa28578
GM
1804** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1805other than 10.
1806
1807*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1808INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1809
5d94f558 1810 #b1111
1fa28578 1811 => 15
5d94f558 1812 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1813 => -15
1814
1815*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1816
5d94f558 1817 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1818 => 438
1819
1820*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1821
5d94f558 1822 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1823 => 48815
1824
1825*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1826
5d94f558 1827 #2R-111
1fa28578 1828 => -7
5d94f558 1829 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
1830 => 267
1831
3d4ff2dd 1832** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1833the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1834and isn't a string.
1835
3d4ff2dd
GM
1836** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1837a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1838value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1839not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1840
16ce590d
DL
1841+++
1842** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1843
73825616 1844** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1845for a regexp in a string.
1846
1847** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1848`mouse-position-function'.
1849
723e779c
GM
1850** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1851that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1852
d1e103b2
GM
1853** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1854Keywords are now always considered constants.
1855
31047e0d
DL
1856+++
1857** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1858returns it.
1859
7a85e4df
GM
1860** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1861returned by function `recent-keys'.
1862
02b14400
RS
1863+++
1864** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1865can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1866Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1867etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1868mode.
404fa7d6 1869
02b14400 1870+++
8964fec7
SM
1871** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1872and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1873
02b14400
RS
1874+++
1875** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1876has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1877function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1878returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1879been performed."
1880
1881When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1882and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1883hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1884then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1885
02b14400 1886+++
81da8b32
GM
1887** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1888In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1889and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1890
02b14400 1891+++
9e207b90
GM
1892** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1893with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1894specified table.
1895
1896 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1897
1898Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1899TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1900saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1901what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1902
02b14400 1903+++
d7f89643 1904** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1905Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1906
02b14400 1907+++
dde9e75a
GM
1908** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1909removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1910
02b14400 1911+++
9da30515
GM
1912** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1913instead of being optional.
1914
02b14400 1915+++
d20679eb
GM
1916** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1917modify read-only text.
1918
02b14400 1919+++
fbc164de
PE
1920** New functions and variables for locales.
1921
1922The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1923decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1924time functions like strftime. The new variables
1925`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1926locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1927
1928The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1929environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1930the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1931environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1932not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1933`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1934`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1935
02b14400 1936+++
863476d1
SM
1937** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1938To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1939modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1940start sequences.
1941
02b14400 1942+++
ef6d912c
GM
1943** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1944because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1945
02b14400 1946+++
a933dad1
DL
1947** New function `propertize'
1948
1949The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1950strings with text properties.
1951
1952- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1953
1954Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1955by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1956PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1957specified value of that property. Example:
1958
1959 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1960
1961+++
1962** push and pop macros.
1963
02b14400
RS
1964Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1965are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1966as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1967
1968(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1969(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1970 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1971
02b14400
RS
1972** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1973
6c7fd5aa
RS
1974Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1975are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1976
1977(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1978 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1979 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1980 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1981
1982(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1983 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1984 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1985 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1986
a933dad1
DL
1987+++
1988** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1989as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1990
1991[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1992[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1993[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1994[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1995[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1996 space, and DEL.
1997[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1998 and DEL.
1999[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2000 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2001 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2002[:alpha:] matches letters.
2003 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2004 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2005[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2006[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2007[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2008[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2009 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2010 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2011[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2012[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2013[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2014
2015+++
2016** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2017
2018The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2019
2020- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2021
2022The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2023are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2024
2025:test TEST
2026
2027TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2028Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2029it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2030
2031:size SIZE
2032
2033SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2034many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2035
2036:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2037
2038REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2039full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2040size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
20411.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2042old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2043
2044:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2045
2046THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2047hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2048(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2049
2050:weakness WEAK
2051
b548072f
GM
2052WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2053`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2054`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2055collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2056outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2057
2058- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2059
2060Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2061
2062- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2063
2064Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2065
2066- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2067
2068Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2069values are shared.
2070
2071- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2072
2073Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2074
2075- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2076
2077Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2078
2079- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2080
2081Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2082
2083- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2084
2085Returns the size of TABLE.
2086
d96d6bb0 2087- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2088
2089Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2090
2091- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2092
2093Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2094
2095- Function: clrhash TABLE
2096
2097Clear TABLE.
2098
2099- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2100
2101Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2102not found.
2103
79214ddf 2104- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2105
2106Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2107another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2108
2109- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2110
2111Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2112
2113- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2114
2115Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2116arguments KEY and VALUE.
2117
2118- Function: sxhash OBJ
2119
2120Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2121
2122- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2123
2124Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2125a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2126comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2127and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2128of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2129
2130TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2131
2132HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2133code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2134integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2135
2136Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2137be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2138
2139 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2140 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2141
2142 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2143 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2144
79214ddf 2145 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2146 'case-fold-string-hash))
2147
2148 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2149
2150+++
2151** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2152
2153It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2154circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2155a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2156
2157+++
2158** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2159
2160If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2161#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2162
a933dad1
DL
2163+++
2164** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2165t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2166specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2167is too short to reach that column.
2168
2169+++
2170** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2171now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2172after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2173two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2174
2175If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2176perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2177and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2178
2179+++
2180** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2181to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2182
2183+++
2184** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2185calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2186
2187+++
2188** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2189directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2190small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2191small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2192temporary-file-directory instead.
2193
2194+++
2195** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2196the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2197`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2198hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2199
2200+++
2201** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2202elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2203
2204+++
2205** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2206
2207make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2208creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2209ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2210
2211+++
2212** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2213
2214The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2215on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2216is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2217never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2218ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2219overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2220
2221If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2222that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2223to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2224The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2225
2226+++
2227** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2228
2229Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2230If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2231ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2232result string.
2233
2234Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2235string where arguments appear in the result string.
2236
2237Example:
2238
2239 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2240 (s2 "world"))
2241 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2242 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2243 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2244
2245results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2246
2247+++
2248** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2249
2250Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2251The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2252argument in it.
2253
2254 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2255 (arg "world"))
2256 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2257 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2258 (message msg arg))
2259
2260+++
2261** Sound support
2262
2263Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2264(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2265
2266Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2267(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2268to enable sound support.
2269
2270Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2271list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2272when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2273functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2274sound to play, before playing the sound.
2275
2276The following sound properties are supported:
2277
2278- `:file FILE'
2279
2280FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2281searched relative to `data-directory'.
2282
6fb40beb
GM
2283- `:data DATA'
2284
2285DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2286may be present, but not both.
2287
a933dad1
DL
2288- `:volume VOLUME'
2289
2290VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
22910..1. This property is optional.
2292
2293Other properties are ignored.
2294
2295** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2296
2297** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2298a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2299
2300** Changes to garbage collection
2301
2302*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2303of live and free strings.
2304
2305*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2306strings that have been consed so far.
2307
a933dad1 2308\f
04545643
GM
2309* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2310Lisp Manual
2311
9a8d84ca
DL
2312+++
2313** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2314
2315** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2316image.
2317
2318- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2319
2320Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2321
2322SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2323measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2324character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2325font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2326FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2327
0b8a3a6d
DL
2328** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2329satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2330
2331+++
2332** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2333optional.
2334
04545643
GM
2335** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2336
2337When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2338around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2339at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2340properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2341
2342\f
a933dad1
DL
2343* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2344
2345Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2346--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2347When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2348so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2349
f6d3257b
GM
2350** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2351to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2352
2353Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2354text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2355is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2356your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2357laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2358just display it black instead.
2359
2360This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2361a line like
2362
2363 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2364
2365in your `.emacs'.
2366
a933dad1
DL
2367** New face implementation.
2368
2369Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2370font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2371
2372+++
2373*** New faces.
2374
2375Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2376
2377 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2378
a933dad1
DL
2379 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2380 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2381
a933dad1 2382 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2383
a933dad1 2384 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2385
a933dad1 2386 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2387
a933dad1 2388 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2389
a933dad1
DL
2390 7. Background color.
2391
2392 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2393
2394 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2395
2396 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2397
2398 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2399
2400 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2401 color.
2402
2403 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2404 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2405
2406Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2407same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2408frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2409faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2410with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2411attributes mentioned above.
2412
2413There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2414definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2415created frames.
79214ddf 2416
a933dad1
DL
2417A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2418have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2419`fully-specified'.
2420
2421+++
2422*** Face merging.
2423
2424The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2425combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2426aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2427properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2428that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2429results in a fully-specified face.
2430
2431+++
2432*** Face realization.
2433
2434After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2435merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2436realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2437available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2438face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2439cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2440
2441Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2442character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2443for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2444charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2445
2446Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2447specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2448being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2449the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2450statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2451
2452In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2453`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
24540x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2455the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2456initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2457Emacs.
2458
2459Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2460`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2461registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2462with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2463
2464++++
2465**** Clearing face caches.
2466
2467The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2468on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2469unused fonts.
2470
2471+++
2472*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2473
a933dad1
DL
2474Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2475given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2476for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2477
2478If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2479pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2480family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2481property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2482an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2483
2484Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2485against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2486match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2487
2488Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2489
2490The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2491attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2492face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2493names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2494that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2495width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2496to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2497
2498Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2499specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2500face doesn't exist.
2501
2502+++
2503**** Scalable fonts
2504
2505Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2506since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2507servers.
2508
2509To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2510`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2511scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2512Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2513scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2514that list. Example:
2515
2516 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2517
2518allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2519
2520+++
2521*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2522
2523- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2524
2525Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2526is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2527string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2528
2529If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2530the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2531FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2532POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2533SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2534These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2535if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2536REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2537the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2538of the face font sort order.
2539
79214ddf 2540- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2541
2542Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2543omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2544(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2545non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2546
2547- Variable: font-list-limit
2548
2549Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2550won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2551matching font. The default is currently 100.
2552
2553+++
2554*** Setting face attributes.
2555
2556For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2557with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2558implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2559`face-attribute'.
2560
2561Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2562symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2563
2564The following attributes are recognized:
2565
2566`:family'
2567
2568VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2569or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2570and `?' are allowed.
2571
2572`:width'
2573
2574VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2575It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2576`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2577`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2578
2579`:height'
2580
2581VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
25821/10 pt.
2583
2584`:weight'
2585
2586VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2587symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2588`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2589
2590`:slant'
2591
2592VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2593symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2594`reverse-oblique'.
2595
2596`:foreground', `:background'
2597
2598VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2599
2600`:underline'
2601
2602VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2603VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2604a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2605don't underline.
2606
2607`:overline'
2608
2609VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2610VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2611string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2612overline.
2613
2614`:strike-through'
2615
2616VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2617striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2618face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2619is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2620
2621`:box'
2622
2623VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2624around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2625VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2626of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2627and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2628VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2629:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2630the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2631specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2632defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2633the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2634color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2635should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2636like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2637that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2638the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2639box.
2640
2641`:inverse-video'
2642
2643VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2644inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2645
2646`:stipple'
2647
2648If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2649The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2650searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2651HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2652is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2653explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2654
2655For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2656and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2657
2658`:font'
2659
2660Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2661XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2662is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2663versions of Emacs.
2664
2665For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2666be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2667must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2668
2669Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2670`defface'.
2671
2672*** Face attributes and X resources
2673
2674The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2675from X resources:
2676
2677 Face attribute X resource class
2678-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2679 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2680 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2681 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2682 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2683 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2684 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2685 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2686 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2687 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2688 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2689 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2690 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2691 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2692 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2693 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2694 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2695 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2696 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2697 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2698
2699+++
2700*** Text property `face'.
2701
2702The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2703specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2704specification can be
2705
27061. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2707
27082. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2709 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2710 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2711 for face attribute names.
2712
27133. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2714 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2715 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2716
2717+++
2718** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2719
acf3ecb7
EZ
2720The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2721on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2722the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2723default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2724`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2725used to clear the mapping table.
2726
acf3ecb7
EZ
2727** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2728
2729The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2730and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2731type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2732color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2733display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2734old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2735`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2736compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2737should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2738modify their color-related behavior.
2739
2740The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2741any frame type.
2742
8a5719f0
EZ
2743** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2744
2745The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2746`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2747`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2748`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2749`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2750`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2751display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2752the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2753platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2754
a933dad1
DL
2755+++
2756** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2757
463cac2d 2758This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2759
2760The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2761end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2762Otherwise, it returns zero.
2763
463cac2d
GM
2764** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2765
2766There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2767buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2768property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2769
9a9dfda8 2770Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2771forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2772to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2773not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2774commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2775boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2776`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2777functions.
463cac2d
GM
2778
2779Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2780a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2781editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2782
9a9dfda8
GM
2783The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2784
59927f88 2785- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2786
2787Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2788
9a9dfda8
GM
2789A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2790If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2791constrained position if that is is different.
2792
2793If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2794positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2795ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2796constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2797as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2798is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2799fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2800the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2801also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2802
2803If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2804NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2805unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2806C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2807only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2808
59927f88
MB
2809If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2810a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2811
2812Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
2813
2814- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 2815
59927f88 2816Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 2817A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2818If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2819
2820- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2821
2822Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2823A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2824If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2825If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
2826field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2827
2828- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2829
2830Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2831A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2832If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2833If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
2834then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2835
2836- Function: field-string &optional POS
2837
2838Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2839A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2840If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2841
2842- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2843
2844Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2845A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2846If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 2847
a933dad1
DL
2848+++
2849** Image support.
2850
2851Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2852strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2853(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2854replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2855
2856If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2857`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2858AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2859window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2860area.
2861
2862IMAGE is an image specification.
2863
2864*** Image specifications
2865
2866Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2867is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2868specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2869symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2870described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2871
2872The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2873
2874`:ascent ASCENT'
2875
576da55d
GM
2876ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2877If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 2878to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
2879
2880If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2881image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2882
5d94f558 2883If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
2884centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2885of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2886overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2887
2888`:margin MARGIN'
2889
79214ddf 2890MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2891margin around the image. Default is 0.
2892
2893`:relief RELIEF'
2894
2895RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2896around an image.
2897
2898`:algorithm ALGO'
2899
2900Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2901be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2902supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2903which is intended to display images "disabled."
2904
2905`:heuristic-mask BG'
2906
2907If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2908background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2909determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2910corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2911the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2912be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2913background of the image.
2914
2915`:file FILE'
2916
2917Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2918search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2919building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2920may be present in the image specification.
2921
518df5c4
GM
2922`:data DATA'
2923
2924Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2925supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2926present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2927support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2928
a933dad1
DL
2929*** Supported image types
2930
b246b1f6 2931**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2932
2933XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2934properties supported are
2935
2936`:foreground FG'
2937
2938FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2939is the frame's foreground.
2940
2941`:background FG'
2942
2943BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2944the frame's background color.
2945
2946XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2947case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2948instead of a `:file' property.
2949
2950`:width WIDTH'
2951
2952WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2953
2954`:height HEIGHT'
2955
2956HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2957
2958`:data DATA'
2959
2960DATA must be either
2961
2962 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2963 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2964
2965 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2966
2967 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2968 bitmap.
2969
c76e04a8
GM
2970 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2971 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2972 in the file.
2973
a933dad1
DL
2974**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2975
2976XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2977`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2978found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2979`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2980
2981Additional image properties supported are:
2982
2983`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2984
2985SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2986name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2987name.
2988
2989XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2990add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2991
a933dad1
DL
2992The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2993to display compressed images.
2994
2995**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2996
2997PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2998mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2999defined.
3000
3001**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3002
3003Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3004package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3005are:
3006
a933dad1
DL
3007**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3008
3009Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3010package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3011properties defined.
3012
3013**** GIF, image type `gif'
3014
3015Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3016`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3017
3018Additional image properties supported are:
3019
3020`:index INDEX'
3021
3022INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3023multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3024
3025This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3026For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3027at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3028every 0.1 seconds.
3029
3030(defun show-anim (file max)
3031 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3032 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3033
3034(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3035 (when (= idx max)
3036 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3037 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3038 (save-excursion
3039 (set-buffer buffer)
3040 (goto-char (point-min))
3041 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3042 (insert-image img "x"))
3043 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3044
3045**** PNG, image type `png'
3046
3047Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3048package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3049properties defined.
3050
3051**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3052
3053Additional image properties supported are:
3054
3055`:pt-width WIDTH'
3056
3057WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3058integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3059
3060`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3061
3062HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3063must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3064
3065`:bounding-box BOX'
3066
3067BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3068the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3069files. This is an required property.
3070
3071Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3072lisp/gs.el.
3073
3074*** Lisp interface.
3075
79214ddf
FP
3076The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3077which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3078
3079Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3080they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3081The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3082manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3083images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3084
3085*** Simplified image API, image.el
3086
3087The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3088creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3089can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3090define an image based on available image types. The functions
3091`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3092buffer.
3093
3094+++
3095** Display margins.
3096
3097Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3098and images.
3099
3100To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3101`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3102`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3103obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3104`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3105the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3106of the display margins.
3107
3108You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3109containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3110one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3111string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3112in this file).
3113
3114+++
3115** Help display
3116
3117Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3118moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3119`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3120that have a `help-echo' property.
3121
9662da0b 3122If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3123is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3124the window in which the help was found.
3125
3126If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3127`help-echo' text property was found.
3128
3129If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3130POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3131
3132If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3133the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3134mouse.
d5aa31d8 3135
9662da0b
GM
3136If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3137string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3138
3139For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3140determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3141property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3142For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3143used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3144
3145The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3146the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3147causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3148
3149+++
3150** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3151
3152The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3153This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3154
3155The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3156scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3157The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3158scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3159used.
3160
79214ddf
FP
3161 (global-set-key [A-down]
3162 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3163 (interactive)
79214ddf 3164 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3165 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3166 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3167 #'(lambda ()
3168 (interactive)
79214ddf 3169 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3170 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3171
3172+++
3173** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3174
3175Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3176when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3177variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3178is called with one argument, POS.
3179
3180At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3181characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3182as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3183property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3184`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3185
3186+++
3187** Tool bar support.
3188
3189Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3190parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3191controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3192suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3193`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3194automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3195
3196*** Tool bar item definitions
3197
3198Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3199`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3200where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3201
a933dad1
DL
3202CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3203evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3204the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3205property (see below).
79214ddf 3206
a933dad1
DL
3207BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3208binding are currently ignored.
3209
3210The following properties are recognized:
3211
3212`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3213
a933dad1
DL
3214FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3215or disabled.
79214ddf 3216
a933dad1 3217`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3218
a933dad1 3219FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3220
a933dad1
DL
3221`:filter FUNCTION'
3222
3223FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3224FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3225used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3226
a933dad1
DL
3227`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3228
3229TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3230and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3231
a933dad1
DL
3232`:image IMAGES'
3233
3234IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3235image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3236meaning of each of the four elements:
3237
3238 Index Use when item is
3239 ----------------------------------------
3240 0 enabled and selected
3241 1 enabled and deselected
3242 2 disabled and selected
3243 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3244
4ba7246d
GM
3245If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3246algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3247
a933dad1 3248`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3249
a933dad1
DL
3250Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3251is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3252
3253*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3254
3255If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3256resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3257than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3258
79214ddf 3259If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3260raised when the mouse moves over them.
3261
3262You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3263`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3264pixels. Default is 1.
3265
3266You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3267`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3268
3269*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3270
3271You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3272a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3273
3274 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3275 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3276 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3277
3278is the original tool bar item definition, then
3279
3280 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3281
3282makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3283item.
3284
3285** Mode line changes.
3286
3287+++
3288*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3289
3290The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3291that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3292a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3293
32941. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3295a `local-map' text property.
3296
32972. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3298that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3299
33003. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3301is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3302`local-map' property.
3303
3304The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3305properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3306example.
3307
54522c9f
GM
3308*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3309evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3310
a933dad1
DL
3311+++
3312*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3313variable mode-line-format to nil.
3314
3315+++
3316*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3317
3318This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3319`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3320completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3321`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3322line.
3323
3324The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3325`header-line'.
3326
3327The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3328position in the header-line.
3329
3330+++
3331** Text property `display'
3332
3333The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3334also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3335`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3336below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3337
3338*** Variable width and height spaces
3339
3340To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3341specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3342`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3343area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3344marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3345displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3346simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3347
3348The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3349PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3350properties described below.
3351
3352The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3353characters having the `display' property.
3354
3355- :width WIDTH
3356
3357Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3358character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3359
3360- :relative-width FACTOR
3361
3362Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3363first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3364same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3365width of that character by FACTOR.
3366
3367- :align-to HPOS
3368
3369Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3370value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3371
3372Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3373
3374- :height HEIGHT
3375
3376Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3377normal line height.
3378
3379- :relative-height FACTOR
3380
3381The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3382of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3383
3384- :ascent ASCENT
3385
3386Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3387used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3388baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3389equal to 100.
3390
3391You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3392
3393*** Images
3394
3395A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3396. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3397in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3398their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3399the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3400`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3401area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3402the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3403as display specification.
3404
3405*** Other display properties
3406
3407- :space-width FACTOR
3408
3409Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3410should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3411integer or float.
3412
3413- :height HEIGHT
3414
3415Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3416
3417If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3418means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3419the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3420``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3421a font is available counts as a step.
3422
3423If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3424as tall as the frame's default font.
3425
3426If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3427height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3428
3429Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3430`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3431
3432- :raise FACTOR
3433
3434FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3435font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3436raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3437amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3438`:height' subproperty.
3439
3440*** Conditional display properties
3441
3442All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3443has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3444applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3445During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3446the text having the `display' property.
3447
3448The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3449`(:when t SPEC)'.
3450
3451+++
3452** New menu separator types.
3453
3454Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3455item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3456treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3457to specify other menu separator types.
3458
3459- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3460
3461No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3462separator occurs.
3463
3464- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3465
3466A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3467
3468- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3469
3470A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3471
3472- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3473
3474A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3475
3476- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3477
3478A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3479
3480- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3481
3482A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3483displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3484
3485- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3486
3487A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3488
3489- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3490
3491A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3492
3493- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3494
3495A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3496
3497- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3498
3499Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3500
3501- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3502
3503Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3504
3505- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3506
3507Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3508
3509- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3510
3511Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3512
3513Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3514the corresponding single-line separators.
3515
3516+++
3517** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3518
3519The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3520`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3521Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3522that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3523default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3524default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3525default foreground is black.
3526
3527The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3528(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3529`ScrollBarBackground').
3530
3531Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3532settings for scroll bar colors.
3533
3534+++
3535** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3536display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3537
3538---
3539** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3540starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3541on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3542line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3543the original window start.
3544
3545---
3546** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3547`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3548now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3549
3550+++
3551** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3552
3553A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3554`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3555windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3556other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3557
3558The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3559fixed-width and fixed-height.
3560
3561 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3562
3563A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3564fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3565window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3566change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3567temporarily to nil, for example
3568
3569 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3570 (enlarge-window 10))
3571
79214ddf 3572Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3573or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3574
3575** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3576terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3577to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3578overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3579horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3580support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3581
3787e12e
GM
3582
3583^L
3584* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3585
3586** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3587input.
3588
3589** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3590
3591** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3592
3593** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3594only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3595exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3596(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3597(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3598
3599** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3600been added.
3601
3602^L
3603* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3604
3605** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3606
3607^L
3608* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3609
3610** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3611M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3612\f
3613* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3614
3615** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3616
3617You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3618Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3619`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3620
3621If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3622is the one that is used.
3623
3624** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3625the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3626Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3627separate from the command's regular output.
3628Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3629says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3630In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3631the buffer name.
3632
3633When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3634output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3635it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3636cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3637
3638** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3639the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3640is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3641created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3642
3643** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3644example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3645match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3646quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3647
3648** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3649now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3650if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3651they never ignore case.
3652
3653** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3654under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3655applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3656of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3657just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3658convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3659part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3660
3661If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3662the same format that was used in the file before.
3663
3664You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3665`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3666
3667** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3668renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3669This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3670
3671** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3672The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3673buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3674your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3675is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3676end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3677Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3678
3679The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3680eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3681control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3682format. You can now customize these variables.
3683
3684** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3685filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3686filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3687enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3688
3689** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3690in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3691windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3692
3693** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3694dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3695doesn't have any effect.
3696
3697** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3698not one per buffer.
3699
3700** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3701use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3702 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3703
3704** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3705To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3706`auto-show-mode' command.
3707
3708** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3709avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3710versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3711choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3712occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3713
3714** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3715cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3716
3717** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3718character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3719feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3720
3721** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3722the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3723interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3724and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3725
3726** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3727
3728The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3729that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3730one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3731codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3732set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3733
3734Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3735from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3736
3737IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3738equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3739a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3740`?' on other systems.
3741
3742IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3743feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3744Unix.
3745
3746Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3747current codepage when it starts.
3748
3749** Mail changes
3750
3751*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3752`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3753appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3754non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3755MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3756headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3757latin-1:
3758
3759 MIME-version: 1.0
3760 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3761 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3762
3763*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3764default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3765default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3766sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3767buffer-file-coding-system.
3768
3769You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3770sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3771mail.
3772
3773*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3774if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3775Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3776list of possible coding systems.
3777
3778** CC Mode changes
3779
3780*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3781modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3782longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3783docstring for details.
3784
3785*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3786symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3787found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3788prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3789lineup functions use this feature currently.
3790
3791*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3792"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3793
3794*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3795"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3796
3797*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3798from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3799symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3800c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3801anonymous classes.
3802
3803*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3804syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3805
3806*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3807inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3808support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3809function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3810
3811*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3812(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3813brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3814c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3815(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3816
3817*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3818
3819*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3820
3821*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3822for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3823
3824*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3825
3826*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3827associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3828This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3829circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3830class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3831
3832** Gnus changes.
3833
3834*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3835added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3836Gnus manual for the full story.
3837
3838*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3839before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3840group, which is created automatically.
3841
3842*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3843values.
3844
3845*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3846
3847*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3848outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3849
3850*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3851`C-u C-c C-c'.
3852
3853*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3854
3855*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3856re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3857
3858*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3859
3860*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3861Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3862
3863*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3864`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3865
3866*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3867control over simplification.
3868
3869*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3870
3871*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3872limit.
3873
3874*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3875
3876*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3877
3878*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3879If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3880rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3881
3882*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3883`a' forces normal posting method.
3884
3885*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3886-- `W d'.
3887
3888*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3889to a non-nil value.
3890
3891*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3892where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3893
3894*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3895has been added.
3896
3897*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3898
3899*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3900
3901*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3902`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3903
3904*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3905`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3906
3907*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3908
3909*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3910been added.
3911
3912*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3913`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3914
3915*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3916updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3917
3918*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3919
3920*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3921
3922*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3923
3924** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3925
3926*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3927options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3928nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3929
3930*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3931TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3932of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3933TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3934can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3935
3936*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3937All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3938but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3939the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3940
3941*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3942the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3943buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3944mismatch.
3945
3946** Changes to RefTeX mode
3947
3948*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3949file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3950
3951*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3952lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3953characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3954removed from the label.
3955
3956*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3957a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3958
3959*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3960customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3961
3962*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3963`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3964expressions.
3965
3966*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3967
3968** New/deleted modes and packages
3969
3970*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3971SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3972
3973*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3974editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3975SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3976
3977*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3978changes with a special face.
3979
3980*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3981this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3982Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3983\f
3984* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3985
3986** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3987This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3988conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3989and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3990check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3991
3992The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3993Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3994distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3995
3996** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3997MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3998controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3999directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4000Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4001on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4002string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4003program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4004printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4005
4006** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4007output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4008available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4009input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4010temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4011program.
4012
4013An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4014and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4015programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4016automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4017as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4018ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4019
4020** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4021a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4022MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4023was not documented clearly before.
4024
4025** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4026This includes Tetris and Snake.
4027\f
4028* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4029
4030** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4031return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4032They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4033meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4034
4035** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4036WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4037and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4038
4039** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4040
4041*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4042It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4043
4044*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4045the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4046integers.
4047
4048** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4049files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4050arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4051file names and attributes are returned.
4052
4053** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4054sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4055accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4056It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4057returns the result.
4058
4059** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4060to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4061
4062** New functions for base64 conversion:
4063
4064The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4065into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4066performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4067optionally.
4068
4069Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4070job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4071
4072**
4073The new function process-running-child-p
4074will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4075terminal to its own child process.
4076
4077** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4078when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4079to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4080itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4081
4082** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4083be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4084
4085** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4086:included is an alias for :visible.
4087
4088easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4089easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4090to move or copy menu entries.
4091
4092** Multibyte editing changes
4093
4094*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4095an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4096make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4097work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4098char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4099 (setq char (sref str idx)
4100 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4101The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4102
4103If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4104(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4105 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4106
4107*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4108region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4109deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4110
4111 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4112
4113This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4114across the boundary.
4115
4116*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4117`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4118 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4119 contains 8-bit characters.
4120 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4121 contains invalid characters.
4122
4123*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4124text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4125preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4126text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4127way.
4128
4129*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4130If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4131end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4132prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4133
4134*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4135compose Thai characters in a string.
4136
4137** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4138argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4139for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4140menus should always use the third argument.
4141
4142** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4143read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4144arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4145input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4146
4147** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4148of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4149programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4150inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4151
4152** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4153the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4154returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4155echo area contents.
4156
4157 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4158
4159** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4160NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4161requested feature cannot be loaded.
4162
4163** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4164foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4165means to clear out that attribute.
4166
4167** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4168gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4169
4170** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4171read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4172unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4173end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4174
4175** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4176the gap of the current buffer.
4177
4178** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4179to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4180current buffer.
4181
4182** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4183facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4184These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4185it back in after any modifications have been made.
4186\f
4187* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4188
4189** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4190the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4191/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4192directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4193subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4194
4195Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4196names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4197Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4198which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4199these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4200
4201Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4202starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4203time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4204
4205This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4206Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4207to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4208subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4209`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4210results.
4211
4212** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4213GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4214that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4215fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4216\f
4217* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4218
4219** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4220including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4221it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4222perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4223
4224** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4225specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4226region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4227further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4228command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4229within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4230are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4231region.
4232
4233In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4234selective undo.
4235
4236** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4237unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4238buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4239effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4240Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4241
4242The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4243though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4244-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4245load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4246
4247** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4248no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4249enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4250something that most users not do.
4251
4252** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4253operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4254The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4255applications.
4256
4257C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4258pasting operations.
4259
4260** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4261setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4262like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4263printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4264`ps-printer-name'.
4265
4266** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4267minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4268any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4269except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4270incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4271hits a new word.
4272
4273Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4274Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4275to be confused by TeX commands.
4276
4277You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4278correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4279clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4280of various alternative replacements and actions.
4281
4282Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4283the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4284corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4285alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4286flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4287
4288Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4289flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4290
4291** Changes in input method usage.
4292
4293Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4294the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4295respectively.
4296
4297You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4298
4299If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4300of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4301
4302The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4303that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4304
4305 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4306
4307 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4308
4309 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4310 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4311
4312 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4313 given in the following case:
4314 o When you are using a complex input method.
4315 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4316
4317If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4318input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4319and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4320setting it to t is helpful.
4321
4322The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4323
4324In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4325keys:
4326 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4327 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4328 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4329These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4330environment.
4331
4332** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4333names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4334minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4335get
4336
4337 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4338
4339which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4340
4341Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4342Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4343
4344** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4345at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4346its owner and group.
4347
4348** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4349Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4350
4351** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4352contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4353
4354** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4355which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4356in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4357by the left edge of the rectangle.
4358
4359** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4360increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4361C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4362for writing keyboard macros.
4363
4364** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4365files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4366frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4367the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4368additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4369info.
4370
4371** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4372
4373** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4374query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4375contents only.
4376
4377** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4378confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4379the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4380says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4381
4382** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4383non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4384literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4385
4386** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4387now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4388Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4389inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4390
4391** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4392failure if the command produces no output.
4393
4394** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4395manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4396the mouse.
4397
4398** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4399mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4400function and variable names.
4401
4402** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4403reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4404file-coding-system-alist.
4405
4406** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4407t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4408converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4409the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4410according to the current fontset.
4411
4412** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4413
4414The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4415that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4416nonascii-insert-offset.
4417
4418For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4419enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4420nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4421characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4422
4423** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4424an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4425
4426** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4427letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4428
4429** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4430are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4431command keys.
4432
4433** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4434user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4435
4436Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4437user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4438all variables that have documentation.
4439
4440** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4441shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4442that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4443minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4444it should show; the default is 20.
4445
4446Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4447the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4448of your input.
4449
4450** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4451all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4452recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4453argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4454the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4455Newly added options are included as well.
4456
4457If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4458then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4459for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4460
4461This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4462Customize menu.
4463
4464** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4465the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4466
4467** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4468buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4469invoked.
4470
4471** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4472that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4473The default is 1.
4474
4475** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4476syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4477new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4478(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4479sensibly.
4480
4481** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4482
4483** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4484value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4485two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4486
4487** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4488reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4489for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4490every night.
4491
4492** Desktop changes
4493
4494*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4495the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4496
4497*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4498and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4499
4500** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4501read and post multi-lingual articles.
4502
4503** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4504doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4505be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4506outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4507the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4508made invisible again.
4509
4510** Mail reading and sending changes
4511
4512*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4513the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4514changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4515toggle.
4516
4517*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4518now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4519summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4520the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4521rmail-default-body-file.
4522
4523*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4524longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4525handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4526
4527*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4528it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4529is evaluated to insert the signature.
4530
4531*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4532outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4533handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4534putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4535transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4536especially interested in trying feedmail.
4537
4538feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4539feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4540provided by feedmail are:
4541
4542**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4543stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4544there is also a queue for draft messages
4545
4546**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4547be prompted for confirmation
4548
4549**** does smart filling of address headers
4550
4551**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4552the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4553can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4554
4555**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4556the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4557/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4558function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4559
4560** Dired changes
4561
4562*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4563files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4564
4565*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4566run Dired on the directory name at point.
4567
4568*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4569files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4570for a specified regexp.
4571
4572** VC Changes
4573
4574*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4575conveniently.
4576
4577*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4578faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4579Dired.
4580
4581VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4582directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4583listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4584currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4585
4586You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4587then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4588vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4589control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4590on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4591
4592All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4593is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4594`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4595the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4596`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4597
4598The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4599toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4600VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4601`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4602
4603Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4604ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4605command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4606
4607*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4608file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4609session to resolve them.
4610
4611Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4612resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4613contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4614uses as well).
4615
4616*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4617command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4618you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4619either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4620branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4621If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4622using ediff.
4623
4624** Changes in Font Lock
4625
4626*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4627are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4628use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4629unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4630compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4631
4632** Frame name display changes
4633
4634*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4635frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4636raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4637when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4638
4639*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4640frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4641menu.
4642
4643** Comint (subshell) changes
4644
4645*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4646subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4647with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4648
4649*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4650
4651C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4652that is, the line after the last line you got.
4653You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4654
4655C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4656send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4657the following line.
4658
4659C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4660which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4661previously sent input.
4662
4663C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4664it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4665as the search string.
4666
4667*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4668automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4669
4670** C mode changes
4671
4672*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4673and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4674assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4675definition.
4676
4677*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4678(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4679Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4680style is still the default however.
4681
4682*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4683
4684*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4685are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4686them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4687
4688*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4689and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4690
4691*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4692namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4693
4694*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4695makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4696
4697*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4698c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4699
4700*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4701should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4702package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4703variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4704
4705** Changes to hippie-expand.
4706
4707*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4708non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4709which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4710
4711*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4712non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4713expanding dynamically.
4714
4715*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4716non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4717
4718*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4719non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4720this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4721expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4722
4723*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4724
4725** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4726
4727*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4728bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4729automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4730bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4731against the first word in the title.
4732
4733*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4734capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4735bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4736lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4737lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4738bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4739
4740*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4741generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4742replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4743bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4744
4745** Changes in vcursor.el.
4746
4747*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4748and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4749variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4750entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4751`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4752in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4753
4754*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4755Editing group once the package is loaded.
4756
4757*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4758generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4759vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4760
4761*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4762vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4763
4764** Ispell changes.
4765
4766*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4767buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4768are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4769
4770*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4771A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4772and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4773defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4774include:
4775
4776 o URLs are automatically skipped
4777 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4778
4779*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4780
4781** Changes to RefTeX mode
4782
4783RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4784large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4785re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4786section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4787
4788*** New recursive parser.
4789
4790The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4791entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4792recursive parser scans the individual files.
4793
4794*** Parsing only part of a document.
4795
4796Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4797partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4798the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4799
4800 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4801
4802*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4803
4804This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4805
4806 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4807
4808*** Using multiple selection buffers
4809
4810If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4811for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4812
4813 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4814
4815*** References to external documents.
4816
4817The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4818documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4819documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4820macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4821RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4822the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4823The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4824
4825*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4826
4827The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4828and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4829
4830Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4831the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4832
4833*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4834
4835The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4836buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4837
4838*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4839
4840The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4841contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4842`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4843have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4844enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4845at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4846more.
4847
4848*** Support for the varioref package
4849
4850The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4851
4852*** New hooks
4853
4854Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4855and citations are created. These hooks are
4856`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4857`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4858
4859*** Citations outside LaTeX
4860
4861The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4862a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4863
4864*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4865
4866The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4867fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4868fontified, use
4869
4870 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4871
4872** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4873With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4874the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4875directories that contain the same file name.
4876
4877Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4878Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4879file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4880Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4881have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4882names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4883directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4884directory.
4885
4886** New modes and packages
4887
4888*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4889It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4890it, but some do not.
4891
4892*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4893code.
4894
4895*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4896current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4897around in a buffer.
4898
4899Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4900
4901*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4902uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4903be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4904established system of notation similar to Chess.
4905
4906*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4907documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4908guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4909
4910*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4911available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4912system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4913simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4914functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4915the like.
4916
4917*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4918identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4919
4920*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4921within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4922used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4923the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4924
4925*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4926
4927 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4928 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4929 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4930 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4931 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4932 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4933 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4934 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4935 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4936 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4937 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4938
4939 Platform-specific modes:
4940
4941 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4942 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4943 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4944 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4945 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4946 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4947 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4948 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4949 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4950\f
4951* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4952
4953** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4954use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4955That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4956Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4957
4958Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4959you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4960consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4961
4962** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4963and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4964specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4965searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4966
4967** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4968multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4969character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4970environment.
4971
4972** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4973take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4974string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4975current input method for reading this one event.
4976
4977** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4978now control whether to output certain characters as
4979backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4980non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4981characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4982in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4983\f
4984* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4985
4986** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4987of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4988
4989** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4990in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4991always increases point by 1.
4992
4993The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4994considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4995
4996See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4997
4998** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4999Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5000default value changed. For example,
5001
5002 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5003 :type 'integer
5004 :group 'foo
5005 :version "20.3")
5006
5007 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5008 :version "20.3")
5009
5010If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5011default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5012is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5013`:version' in the top level group.
5014
5015This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5016
5017** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5018starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5019
5020However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5021symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5022support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5023to themselves.
5024
5025If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5026this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5027values whatever.
5028
5029** There is a new debugger command, R.
5030It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5031in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5032
5033** Frame-local variables.
5034
5035You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5036the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5037local bindings for that variable.
5038
5039These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5040frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5041modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5042parameter name.
5043
5044Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5045Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5046active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5047that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5048
5049It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5050clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5051very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5052through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5053
5054** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5055"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5056evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5057makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5058See the documentation in sregex.el.
5059
5060** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5061is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5062parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5063The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5064
5065** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5066If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5067
5068** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5069known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5070define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5071
5072** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5073when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5074it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5075history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5076
5077The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5078return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5079empty input.
5080
5081** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5082for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5083`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5084Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5085`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5086
5087** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5088echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5089a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5090default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5091
5092** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5093specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5094function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5095place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5096non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5097
5098** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5099If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5100up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5101end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5102
5103** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5104which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5105If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5106
5107** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5108holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5109was directed to display this buffer.
5110
5111** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5112with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5113describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5114other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5115set-window-configuration.
5116
5117** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5118window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5119positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5120windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5121
5122** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5123override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5124look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5125
5126If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5127non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5128map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5129
5130minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5131and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5132
5133** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5134except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5135
5136** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5137USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5138floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5139
5140** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5141to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5142in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5143it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5144
5145** Menu changes
5146
5147*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5148keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5149better supported.
5150
5151The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5152a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5153you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5154can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5155then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5156
5157*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5158
5159In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5160 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5161defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5162starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5163
5164The format is:
5165 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5166 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5167where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5168string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5169The supported properties include
5170
5171:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5172 item is enabled.
5173:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5174 item should appear in the menu.
5175:filter FILTER-FN
5176 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5177 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5178 It should return a binding to use instead.
5179:keys DESCRIPTION
5180 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5181 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5182 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5183:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5184 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5185 keyboard binding.
5186:key-sequence nil
5187 This means that the command normally has no
5188 keyboard equivalent.
5189:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5190:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5191 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5192 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5193 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5194
5195Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5196Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5197
5198(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5199
5200** New event types
5201
5202*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5203mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5204corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5205which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5206
5207 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5208
5209where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5210same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5211indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5212negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5213the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5214forward, away from the user.
5215
5216As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5217
5218*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5219files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5220and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5221filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5222loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5223
5224 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5225
5226where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5227same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5228that were dragged and dropped.
5229
5230As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5231
5232** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5233
5234*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5235any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5236to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5237
5238*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5239can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5240that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5241
5242*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5243in Emacs 19 and before.
5244
5245The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5246The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5247
5248*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5249buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5250unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5251representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5252
5253This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5254as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5255viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5256one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5257will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5258
5259This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5260representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5261(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5262consistent with the new representation.
5263
5264*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5265representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5266about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5267however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5268
5269The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5270nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5271using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5272
5273*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5274representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5275representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5276
5277The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5278loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5279is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5280
5281*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5282which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5283
5284*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5285which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5286
5287*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5288portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5289so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5290You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5291
5292*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5293it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5294
5295*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5296convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5297buffer or string being searched.
5298
5299One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5300[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5301searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5302searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5303obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5304you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5305expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5306
5307*** Structure of coding system changed.
5308
5309All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5310by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5311which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5312as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5313vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5314your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5315define-coding-system-alias.
5316
5317The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5318the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5319access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5320pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5321character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5322safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5323'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5324`iso-8859-1'.
5325
5326Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5327The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5328coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5329(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5330
5331Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5332also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5333are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5334the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5335
5336*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5337proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5338This function requires a user interaction.
5339
5340*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5341find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5342select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5343systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5344a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5345select-safe-coding-system.
5346
5347*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5348decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5349last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5350was done.
5351
5352*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5353used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5354coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5355
5356*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5357return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5358characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5359`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5360
5361*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5362coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5363coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5364converted.
5365
5366*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5367coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5368
5369*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5370character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5371character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5372each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5373either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5374range of characters.
5375
5376*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5377Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5378
5379*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5380in the current buffer at position POS.
5381
5382*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5383input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5384function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5385character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5386event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5387binding input-method-function to nil.
5388
5389The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5390method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5391input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5392the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5393not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5394
5395The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5396subsequent events of a key sequence.
5397
5398*** You can customize any language environment by using
5399set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5400
5401The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5402customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5403instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5404environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5405exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5406\f
5407* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5408
5409** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5410options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5411at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5412tree structure.
5413
5414M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5415user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5416
5417With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5418session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5419in your .emacs file.)
5420
5421** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5422You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5423
5424** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5425This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5426
5427** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5428immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5429kills the region.
5430
5431The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5432delete the character before point, as usual.
5433
5434** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5435on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5436by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5437
5438** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5439insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5440the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5441onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5442history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5443past.)
5444
5445** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5446This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5447in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5448TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5449makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5450
5451As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5452and is an alias for it.
5453
5454If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5455use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5456
5457** Scrolling changes
5458
5459*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5460position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5461
5462In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5463on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5464where it started.
5465
5466*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5467move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5468screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5469does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5470
5471*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5472top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5473comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5474recenters the window.
5475
5476** International character set support (MULE)
5477
5478Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5479including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5480Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5481Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5482features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5483MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5484
5485Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5486coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5487character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5488variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5489into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5490
5491Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5492generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5493supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5494language, to make it possible to type them.
5495
5496The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5497character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5498
5499The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5500to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5501
5502You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5503
5504 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5505
5506Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5507characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5508argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5509already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5510characters for their work until they want to change.
5511
5512*** Input methods
5513
5514An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5515specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5516has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5517the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5518support several input methods.
5519
5520The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5521another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5522work.
5523
5524A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5525characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5526composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5527consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5528sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5529letter.
5530
5531The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5532by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5533First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5534marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5535mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5536
5537None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5538they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5539phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5540converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5541
5542Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5543word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5544typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5545the first guess is wrong.
5546
5547*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5548turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5549
5550If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5551byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5552they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5553the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5554
5555However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5556use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5557includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5558translate automatically to and from either one.
5559
5560*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5561
5562Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5563file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5564sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5565what you want.
5566
5567If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5568example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5569system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5570multibyte characters in that buffer.
5571
5572If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5573character conversion as well.
5574
5575*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5576
5577A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5578Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5579requires using many fonts.
5580
5581Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5582collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5583
5584A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5585the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5586have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5587you would use a font.
5588
5589If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5590specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5591display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5592
5593The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5594(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5595characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5596or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5597and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5598
5599*** Defining fontsets.
5600
5601Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5602chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5603with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5604
5605Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5606of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5607`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5608standard fontset are created automatically.
5609
5610If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5611argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5612FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5613with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5614name is `fontset-startup'.
5615
5616Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5617The resource value should have this form:
5618 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5619FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5620 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5621 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5622 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5623The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5624of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5625CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5626FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5627
5628Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5629last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5630You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5631
5632For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5633font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5634following resource,
5635 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5636the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5637 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5638Here is the substitution rule:
5639 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5640 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5641 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5642 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5643 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5644
5645The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5646fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5647that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5648
5649With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5650like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5651name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5652fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5653fontsets.
5654
5655*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5656defaults for a particular choice of language.
5657
5658Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5659method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5660visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5661already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5662language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5663system for new files that you create.
5664
5665It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5666set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5667whole Emacs session.
5668
5669For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5670chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5671with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5672
5673*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5674specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5675specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5676the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5677coding systems that Emacs supports.
5678
5679*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5680lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5681This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5682After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5683is used for *the immediately following command*.
5684
5685So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5686write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5687
5688If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5689then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5690
5691For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5692visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5693
5694*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5695construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5696to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5697specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5698of the file.
5699
5700*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5701the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5702code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5703translated into that character code.
5704
5705This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5706various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5707
5708By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5709
5710*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5711the coding system for keyboard input.
5712
5713Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5714with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5715some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5716
5717By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5718
5719Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5720input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5721translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5722to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5723designed to work with terminals.
5724
5725*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5726specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5727This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5728has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5729translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5730in the corresponding buffer.
5731
5732By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5733
5734*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5735to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5736It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5737
5738*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5739an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5740command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5741want to use.
5742
5743C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5744method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5745
5746*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5747layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5748remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5749which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5750
5751*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5752the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5753related information.
5754
5755*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5756HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5757scripts.
5758
5759*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5760information about the support for a particular language.
5761You specify the language as an argument.
5762
5763*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5764the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5765first dash.
5766
5767A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5768(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5769whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
57701 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5771
5772 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5773 B big5 (Chinese)
5774 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5775 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5776 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5777 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5778 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5779 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5780 K euc-korea (Korean)
5781 R koi8 (Russian)
5782 Q tibetan
5783 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5784 T lao
5785 T tis620 (Thai)
5786 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5787 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5788 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5789 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5790 z hz (Chinese)
5791
5792When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5793two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5794coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5795keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5796
5797*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5798conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5799
5800When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5801into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5802rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5803Rmail files themselves.
5804
5805*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5806conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5807
5808Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5809for sending mail:
5810
5811- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5812- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5813- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5814 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5815- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5816
5817*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5818to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5819Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5820translations.
5821
5822** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5823of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5824insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5825without any conversion.
5826
5827** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5828You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5829RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5830any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5831
5832** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5833functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5834
5835Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5836Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5837
5838Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5839mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5840
5841** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5842complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5843in the buffer before point.
5844
5845With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5846symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5847you are using.
5848
5849With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5850just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5851
5852** File locking works with NFS now.
5853
5854The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5855in the same directory as FILENAME.
5856
5857This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5858works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5859can become a bottleneck.
5860
5861The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5862does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5863create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5864file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5865rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5866so useful that the change is worth while.
5867
5868When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5869are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5870collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5871tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5872
5873** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5874it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5875show-paren-mode.
5876
5877** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5878selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5879delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5880
5881** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5882within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5883complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5884
5885** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5886it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5887set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5888
5889** Changes in View mode.
5890
5891*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5892Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5893
5894*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5895view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5896
5897*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5898previous state.
5899
5900*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5901scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5902
5903*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5904non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5905not just the selected window.
5906
5907*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5908read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5909turns View mode on or off.
5910
5911*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5912how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5913delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5914
5915** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5916now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5917
5918** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5919has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5920presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5921which version to compare with.
5922
5923** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5924blocks if a match is inside the block.
5925
5926The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5927is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5928isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5929shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5930
5931By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5932of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5933blocks, all of them or none.
5934
5935** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5936current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5937confirmation first.
5938
5939** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5940now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5941However, the mode will not be changed if
5942(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5943(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5944 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5945(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5946
5947This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5948
5949However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5950these commands do not change the major mode.
5951
5952** M-x occur changes.
5953
5954*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5955it performs a case-sensitive search.
5956
5957*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5958if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5959using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5960
5961** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5962in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5963window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5964that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5965buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5966
5967** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5968after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5969appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5970come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5971
5972** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5973selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5974buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5975
5976** Outline mode changes.
5977
5978*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5979
5980*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5981
5982** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5983you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5984Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5985was already active.
5986
5987The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5988unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5989get confused by it.
5990
5991If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5992set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5993
5994** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5995
5996*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5997conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5998character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5999including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6000
6001The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6002mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6003copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6004
6005*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6006are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6007values.
6008
6009`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6010case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6011`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6012case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6013
6014** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6015certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6016can be. The default value is 30.
6017
6018** Changes in Mail mode.
6019
6020*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6021Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6022composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6023`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6024`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6025behavior.
6026
6027C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6028compose-mail-other-frame.
6029
6030*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6031the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6032replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6033buffer that shows the original message.
6034
6035*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6036with separator lines around the contents.
6037
6038*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6039in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6040definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6041need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6042
6043*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6044
6045**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6046for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6047controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6048Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6049
6050**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6051to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6052/etc/passwd.
6053
6054**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6055to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6056/etc/passwd.
6057
6058** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6059special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6060directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6061reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6062
6063Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6064when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6065be taken to be magic.
6066
6067** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6068files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6069available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6070
6071M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6072(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6073
6074** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6075suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6076
6077In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6078
6079new key dired.el binding old key
6080------- ---------------- -------
6081 * c dired-change-marks c
6082 * m dired-mark m
6083 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6084 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6085 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6086 * u dired-unmark u
6087 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6088 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6089 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6090 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6091 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6092 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6093
6094** Rmail changes.
6095
6096*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6097saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6098chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6099each time you run it.
6100
6101*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6102whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6103
6104*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6105messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6106means to move in the opposite direction.
6107
6108*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6109you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6110
6111*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6112just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6113It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6114can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6115for output.
6116
6117** Gnus changes.
6118
6119*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6120
6121*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6122Gnus.
6123
6124*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6125`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6126
6127*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6128article mode line.
6129
6130*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6131
6132*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6133
6134(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6135
6136*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6137are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6138`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6139
6140*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6141
6142*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6143
6144*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6145See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6146
6147*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6148Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6149used to pick articles.
6150
6151*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6152another have been added.
6153
6154 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6155
6156*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6157generating lines in buffers.
6158
6159*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6160`M-C-_'.
6161
6162*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6163
6164*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6165
6166 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6167
6168*** Scores can be decayed.
6169
6170 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6171
6172*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6173Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6174
6175*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6176the native server.
6177
6178 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6179
6180*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6181(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6182
6183*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6184
6185*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6186even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6187
6188*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6189(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6190
6191 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6192 a group.
6193
6194*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6195sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6196
6197 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6198
6199*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6200
6201 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6202
6203*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6204
6205 Use the `Y c' command.
6206
6207*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6208
6209*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6210
6211 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6212
6213*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6214from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6215
6216 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6217
6218*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6219
6220*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6221the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6222
6223 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6224
6225Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6226and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6227from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6228hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6229this issue.)
6230
6231Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6232automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6233particular news group. This can be done by:
6234
6235 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6236
6237Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6238of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6239"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6240system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6241for reading and posting).
6242
6243CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6244 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6245Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6246newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6247there.
6248
6249Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6250default. Here are some of these default settings:
6251
6252 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6253 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6254 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6255 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6256 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6257
6258When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6259the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6260
6261** CC mode changes.
6262
6263*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6264code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6265values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6266this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6267Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6268loaded.
6269
6270If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6271Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6272style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6273share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6274c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6275must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6276
6277*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6278of the current buffer.
6279
6280*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6281it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6282of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6283
6284*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6285style that the Python developers like.
6286
6287*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6288This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6289just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6290
6291** VC Changes [new]
6292
6293** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6294name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6295directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6296
6297This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6298master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6299developers.
6300
6301You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6302RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6303
6304*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6305other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6306writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6307calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6308
6309*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6310version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6311
6312** Calendar changes.
6313
6314A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6315of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6316for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6317
6318** ps-print changes
6319
6320There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6321
6322*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6323
6324The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6325formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6326`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6327`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6328It defaults to `letter'.
6329If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6330
6331The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6332of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6333non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6334
6335The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6336It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6337It defaults to 1.
6338
6339*** Horizontal layout
6340
6341The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6342`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6343All are measured in points.
6344
6345*** Vertical layout
6346
6347The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6348`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6349All are measured in points.
6350
6351*** Headers
6352
6353If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6354`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6355margin above the text.
6356
6357If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6358framing box is printed around the header.
6359
6360The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6361`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6362
6363The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6364`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6365`ps-header-font-size'.
6366
6367*** Font managing
6368
6369The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6370used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6371`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6372elements to this alist.
6373
6374The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6375for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6376
6377** hideshow changes.
6378
6379*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6380C++, ; for lisp).
6381
6382*** Support for java-mode added.
6383
6384*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6385in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6386
6387*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6388the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6389way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6390
6391*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6392robust and a lot faster.
6393
6394*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6395
6396*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6397to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6398documentation for more details.
6399
6400** Changes in Enriched mode.
6401
6402*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6403filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6404of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6405use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6406the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6407
6408*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6409distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6410as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6411as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6412
6413** Font Lock mode
6414
6415*** Custom support
6416
6417The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6418font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6419faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6420group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6421your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6422consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6423
6424You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6425
6426*** Maximum decoration
6427
6428Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6429default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6430of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6431supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6432to get the old behavior.
6433
6434*** New support
6435
6436Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6437
6438Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6439support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6440
6441*** Configurable support
6442
6443Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6444additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6445c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6446java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6447list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6448of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6449convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6450
6451Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6452way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6453it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6454
6455*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6456
6457You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6458highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6459for any mode.
6460
6461For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6462
6463 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6464
6465in your ~/.emacs.
6466
6467*** New faces
6468
6469Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6470font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6471distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6472to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6473
6474*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6475
6476The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6477cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6478same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6479
6480*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6481
6482The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6483according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6484the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6485non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6486refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6487the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6488Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6489
6490This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6491For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6492this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6493refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6494containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6495the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6496
6497As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6498
6499Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6500Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6501Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6502new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6503
6504If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6505settings.
6506
6507** Ada mode changes.
6508
6509*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6510If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6511procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6512you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6513stubs.
6514
6515*** There are two new commands:
6516 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6517 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6518
6519The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6520`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6521`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6522
6523*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6524is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6525Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6526
6527*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6528formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6529places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6530space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6531
6532** Scheme mode changes.
6533
6534*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6535mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6536for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6537with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6538have any effect.
6539
6540If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6541still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6542scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6543variables as buffer-local variables.
6544
6545*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6546Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6547
6548** Changes to the emacsclient program
6549
6550*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6551USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6552associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6553can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6554
6555*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6556it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6557buffer in Emacs.
6558
6559*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6560use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6561ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6562option takes precedence.
6563
6564** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6565constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6566(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6567
6568** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6569which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6570the current defun.
6571
6572** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6573following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6574
6575** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6576and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6577necessary).
6578
6579** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6580if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6581these register values no longer become completely useless.
6582If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6583asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6584it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6585
6586** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6587example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6588be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6589you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6590
6591You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6592variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6593file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6594revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6595only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6596
6597** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6598since it applies only to the current frame.
6599
6600** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6601file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6602and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6603
6604This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6605multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6606variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6607tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6608instead of just the file you are editing.
6609
6610** RefTeX mode
6611
6612RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6613and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6614different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6615multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6616turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6617
6618C-c ( reftex-label
6619 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6620 knows which kind of label is needed.
6621
6622C-c ) reftex-reference
6623 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6624 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6625
6626C-c [ reftex-citation
6627 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6628 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6629
6630C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6631 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6632
6633C-c = reftex-toc
6634 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6635 can quickly jump to every section.
6636
6637Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6638commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6639Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6640reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6641C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6642
6643** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6644
6645*** Info documentation is now available.
6646
6647*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6648both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6649
6650*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6651bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6652
6653*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6654(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6655
6656*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6657entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6658appropriate functions.
6659
6660*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6661entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6662
6663*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6664been cleaned.
6665
6666*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6667bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6668
6669*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6670shall be delimited.
6671
6672*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6673bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6674bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6675
6676*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6677field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6678prefixed with `ALT'.
6679
6680*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6681bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6682formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6683documentation).
6684
6685*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6686documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6687for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6688
6689*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6690comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6691
6692*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6693alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6694signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6695
6696*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6697
6698*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6699
6700*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6701from alien sources.
6702
6703*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6704to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6705crossref entries.
6706
6707*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6708region.
6709
6710*** Added support for imenu.
6711
6712*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6713of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6714`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6715`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6716
6717*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6718from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6719
6720** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6721
6722** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6723
6724** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6725functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6726Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6727as an argument.
6728
6729When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6730and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6731
6732** browse-url changes
6733
6734*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6735Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6736(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6737non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6738customization variables.
6739
6740*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6741
6742*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6743lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6744(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6745
6746** Changes in Ediff
6747
6748*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6749pops up the Info file for this command.
6750
6751*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6752the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6753merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6754directories).
6755
6756*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6757and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6758files in the same directory.
6759
6760*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6761The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6762related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6763
6764** Changes in Viper
6765
6766*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6767*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6768 instead of vip-.
6769*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6770*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6771Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6772*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6773*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6774*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6775color when Viper is in insert state.
6776*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6777Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6778viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6779
6780** Etags changes.
6781
6782*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6783default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6784Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6785variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6786not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6787
6788*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6789
6790*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6791constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6792
6793*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6794recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6795In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6796
6797*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6798C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6799recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6800methods and protocols.
6801
6802*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6803.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6804column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6805paragraph name.
6806
6807*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6808an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6809at least M times and as many as N times.
6810
6811** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6812in files has changed slightly.
6813
6814With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6815time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6816This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6817with old time-stamp-format values.
6818
6819In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6820(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6821This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6822reasons.
6823
6824In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6825natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6826fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6827(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6828time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6829specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6830
6831Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6832case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6833truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6834
6835The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6836being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6837future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6838recommended now will continue to work then.
6839
6840See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6841details.
6842
6843** There are some additional major modes:
6844
6845dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6846m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6847meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6848
6849** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6850copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6851into Emacs.
6852
6853** New Lisp packages include:
6854
6855*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6856
6857*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6858be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6859
6860*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6861
6862*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6863in shell buffers.
6864
6865*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6866See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6867and `elint-defun'.
6868
6869*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6870meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6871ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6872strings or comments.
6873
6874These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6875abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6876you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6877insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6878at these points.
6879
6880*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6881can visit them by short forms of their names.
6882
6883*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6884Emacs Lisp function at point.
6885
6886*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6887
6888*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6889switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6890
6891*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6892
6893*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6894
6895*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6896
6897*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6898from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6899
6900*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6901You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6902inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6903original place after inserting the copy.
6904
6905*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6906on the buffer.
6907
6908You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6909velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6910(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6911
6912Enable mouse-drag with:
6913 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6914-or-
6915 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6916
6917*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6918mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6919
6920*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6921It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6922
6923*** ogonek
6924
6925The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6926Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6927platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6928TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6929ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6930prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6931instance) and vice versa.
6932
6933To use this package load it using
6934 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6935Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6936 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6937 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6938The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6939ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6940
6941*** Interface to ph.
6942
6943Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6944
6945The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6946services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6947these servers.
6948
6949*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6950
6951*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6952You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6953while the real cursor does not move.
6954
6955*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6956for visiting your favorite web sites.
6957
6958*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6959so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6960
6961** movemail change
6962
6963Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6964mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6965supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6966user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6967
6968This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6969\f
6970* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6971
6972** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6973
6974Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6975end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6976Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6977file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6978file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6979
6980To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6981C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6982coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6983specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6984LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6985save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6986\f
6987* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6988
6989** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6990Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6991vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6992Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6993
6994** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6995to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6996
6997In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6998don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6999"win".
7000
7001** Basic Lisp changes
7002
7003*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7004evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7005
7006*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7007be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7008or by the user.
7009
7010The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7011
7012*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7013
7014(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7015(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7016
7017*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7018usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7019its argument.
7020
7021*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7022
7023*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7024
7025*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7026
7027*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7028error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7029include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7030`format' function.
7031
7032*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7033or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7034whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7035
7036*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7037either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7038adding one of these suffixes.
7039
7040*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7041which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7042If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7043
7044We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7045because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7046
7047*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7048
7049*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7050You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7051
7052*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7053conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7054
7055 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7056
7057BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7058BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7059
7060*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7061choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7062restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7063works using `save-current-buffer'.
7064
7065*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7066write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7067of the last form.
7068
7069*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7070which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7071last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7072as the last form.
7073
7074*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7075characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7076matches.
7077
7078For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7079
7080*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7081with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7082Then it returns that string.
7083
7084For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7085
7086(with-output-to-string
7087 (princ "The buffer is ")
7088 (princ (buffer-name)))
7089
7090returns "The buffer is foo".
7091
7092** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7093is non-nil.
7094
7095These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7096buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7097characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7098
7099*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7100a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7101
7102Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7103character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7104Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7105position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7106characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7107 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7108
7109ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7110Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7111non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7112characters".
7113
7114The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7115through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7116"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7117range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7118leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7119
7120*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7121(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7122multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7123character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7124
7125This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7126always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7127
7128However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7129
7130*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7131because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7132have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7133the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7134guaranteed.
7135
7136*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7137between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7138character).
7139
7140When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7141
7142 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7143 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7144 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7145 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7146 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7147
7148*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7149
7150*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7151`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7152more than the number of characters.
7153
7154You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7155it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7156\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7157is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7158follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7159newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7160
7161*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7162and returns a string containing those characters.
7163
7164*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7165(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7166counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7167character, sref signals an error.
7168
7169*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7170in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7171string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7172
7173*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7174in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7175region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7176
7177*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7178the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7179to a vector of the characters in it.
7180
7181*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7182of a string. You call it as follows:
7183
7184 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7185
7186This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7187STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7188This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7189Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7190it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7191
7192*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7193if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7194
7195*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7196if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7197
7198*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7199to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7200not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7201which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7202
7203(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7204
7205This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7206
7207The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7208If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7209are not included in the resulting value.
7210
7211The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7212at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7213WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7214is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7215
7216If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7217place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7218character extends across that column), then the padding character
7219PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7220string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7221column START-COLUMN.
7222
7223*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7224the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7225necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7226difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7227changed text, before the change.
7228
7229*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7230sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7231one character set for each script, not for each language.
7232
7233**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7234
7235**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7236
7237**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7238set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7239
7240**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7241name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7242which identify the character within that character set.
7243
7244**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7245byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7246opposite of split-char.
7247
7248**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7249of all the characters between BEG and END.
7250
7251**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7252of all the characters in a string.
7253
7254*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7255and specifying coding systems.
7256
7257**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7258system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7259of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7260(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7261and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7262as what to do about code conversion.)
7263
7264**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7265name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7266
7267**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7268for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7269except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7270
7271Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7272which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7273to match against a file name.
7274
7275VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7276a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7277decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7278to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7279systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7280specifies the coding system for encoding.
7281
7282If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7283or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7284
7285**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7286the coding system to use for network sockets.
7287
7288Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7289which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7290either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7291service names.
7292
7293VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7294a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7295decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7296to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7297systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7298specifies the coding system for encoding.
7299
7300If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7301or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7302
7303**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7304for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7305except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7306start the subprocess.
7307
7308**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7309systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7310when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7311(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7312to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7313
7314**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7315coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7316subprocess.
7317
7318It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7319but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7320start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7321connection permanently or until overridden.
7322
7323The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7324file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7325network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7326coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7327It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7328system for one operation at a time.
7329
7330**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7331files, subprocesses or network connections.
7332
7333**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7334coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7335The value is a cons cell,
7336 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7337where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7338the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7339input to the subprocess.
7340
7341**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7342change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7343
7344** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7345customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7346you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7347
7348You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7349variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7350information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7351legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7352customization.
7353
7354Thus, instead of writing
7355
7356 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7357 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7358
7359you would now write this:
7360
7361 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7362 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7363 :type 'boolean
7364 :group foo)
7365
7366The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7367two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7368describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7369for a description of them.
7370
7371The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7372should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7373
7374 (defgroup ispell nil
7375 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7376 :group 'processes)
7377
7378The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7379group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7380but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7381to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7382second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7383
7384Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7385package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7386have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7387package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7388first-level subgroups.
7389
7390** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7391
7392This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7393separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7394
7395** easy-mmode
7396
7397The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7398developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7399only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7400predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7401`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7402`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7403
7404** Text property changes
7405
7406*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7407text property.
7408
7409*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7410previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7411place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7412functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7413starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7414
7415If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7416LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7417of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7418position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7419
7420*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7421value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7422is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7423
7424** Changes in invisibility features
7425
7426*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7427hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7428is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7429should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7430would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7431make the overlay visible.
7432
7433During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7434invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7435needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7436which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7437the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7438t when it should hide it.
7439
7440*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7441
7442Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7443invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7444and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7445Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7446manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7447Here is an example of how to do this:
7448
7449 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7450 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7451 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7452 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7453
7454 ...
7455 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7456
7457 ...
7458 ;; When done with the overlays:
7459 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7460 ;; Or respectively:
7461 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7462
7463** Changes in syntax parsing.
7464
7465*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7466`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7467obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7468`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7469
7470If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7471is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7472used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7473
7474When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7475character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7476
7477 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7478 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7479
7480 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7481 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7482 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7483
7484 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7485 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7486 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7487 determine the syntax type of the character.
7488
7489 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7490 of the current buffer.
7491
7492*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7493value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7494for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7495
7496*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7497and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7498only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7499character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7500another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7501
7502These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7503text property.
7504
7505*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7506arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7507of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7508
7509*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7510(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7511element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7512nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7513string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7514
7515*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7516syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7517`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7518
7519** Changes in face features
7520
7521*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7522if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7523
7524*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7525of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7526
7527*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7528set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7529
7530*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7531set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7532
7533*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7534by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7535and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7536the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7537overlay property).
7538
7539This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7540arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7541
7542** Changes in file-handling functions
7543
7544*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7545directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7546they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7547is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7548
7549This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7550begins with ~.
7551
7552*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7553it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7554
7555*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7556the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7557
7558*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7559as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7560
7561*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7562character code conversion as well as other things.
7563
7564Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7565(formerly it did not).
7566
7567*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7568environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7569
7570*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7571instead of constant strings.
7572
7573*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7574to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7575any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7576
7577substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7578in the same way as before.
7579
7580*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7581The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7582which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7583
7584*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7585error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7586else, and returns nil.
7587
7588*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7589directory cannot be listed.
7590
7591** Changes in minibuffer input
7592
7593*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7594read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7595additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7596argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7597ways:
7598
7599 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7600 It is available through the history command M-n.
7601
7602*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7603read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7604argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7605minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7606enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7607
7608In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7609argument in this way.
7610
7611*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7612from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7613minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7614
7615** Echo area features
7616
7617*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7618echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7619minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7620after the echo area is cleared.
7621
7622*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7623in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7624
7625** Keyboard input features
7626
7627*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7628set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7629
7630*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7631received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7632by keyboard macros.
7633
7634** Frame-related changes
7635
7636*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7637creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7638hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7639
7640*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7641the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7642has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7643
7644*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7645selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7646value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7647in the selected frame.
7648
7649*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7650is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7651which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7652
7653** X Windows features
7654
7655*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7656x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7657x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7658
7659*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7660The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7661
7662*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7663MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7664A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7665
7666If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7667it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7668
7669** Subprocess features
7670
7671*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7672functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7673automatically.
7674
7675*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7676and returns the output from the command as a string.
7677
7678*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7679and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7680
7681** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7682does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7683
7684** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7685at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7686goes after the other menu items.
7687
7688** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7689of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7690around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7691are in use.
7692
7693The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7694series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7695
7696Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7697after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7698form.
7699
7700** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7701is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7702but its hook is still run.
7703
7704** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7705for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7706
7707If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7708regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7709useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7710
7711This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7712are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7713filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7714warned.
7715
7716** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7717way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7718
7719** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7720integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7721functions like display-time.
7722
7723** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7724name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7725
7726** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7727can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7728is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7729
7730** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7731if there is an error in compilation.
7732
7733** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7734switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7735argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7736they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7737
7738** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7739Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7740the *scratch* buffer.
7741
7742** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7743The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7744where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7745e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7746
7747** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7748and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7749It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7750
7751** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7752using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7753variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7754and compose-mail-other-frame.
7755
7756** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7757can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7758full name of the specified user will be returned.
7759
7760** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7761of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7762where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7763in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7764option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7765files at all.
7766
7767** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7768and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7769width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7770the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7771
7772For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7773minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7774with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7775is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7776
7777** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7778
7779** imenu.el changes.
7780
7781You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7782item from menu created by imenu.
7783
7784An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7785#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7786select one of those items.
7787\f
7788* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7789\f
7790* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7791
7792** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7793mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7794
7795** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7796use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7797Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7798\f
7799* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7800
7801** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7802To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7803
7804** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7805conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7806matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7807expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7808word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7809all caps.
7810
7811** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7812at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7813
7814When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7815does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7816as in previous Emacs versions.
7817
7818** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7819non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7820time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7821frames.
7822
7823** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7824if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7825This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7826Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7827accident.
7828
7829** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7830keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7831It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7832line and then executing the macro.
7833
7834This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7835
7836** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7837(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7838characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7839characters.
7840
7841** Font Lock mode
7842
7843*** Font Lock support modes
7844
7845Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7846below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7847hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7848to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7849Font Lock mode is enabled.
7850
7851For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7852
7853 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7854
7855in your ~/.emacs.
7856
7857*** lazy-lock
7858
7859The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7860only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7861becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7862Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7863occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7864buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7865Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7866
7867To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7868
7869 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7870
7871To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7872
7873** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7874
7875*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7876paren and key.
7877
7878*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7879supported.
7880
7881** Gnus changes.
7882
7883Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7884commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7885significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7886previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7887
7888Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7889between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7890
7891*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7892variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7893obsolete.
7894
7895*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7896missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7897
7898 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7899
7900*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7901
7902 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7903
7904*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7905referred.
7906
7907*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7908
7909 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7910
7911*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7912
7913 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7914
7915*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7916buffers.
7917
7918 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7919
7920*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7921
7922 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7923
7924*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7925
7926 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7927
7928*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7929
7930 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7931
7932*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7933is possible.
7934
7935 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7936
7937*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7938groups of groups.
7939
7940*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7941
7942*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7943batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7944
7945*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7946
7947*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7948
7949*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7950
7951 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7952
7953*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7954expiration times.
7955
7956*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7957
7958*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7959process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7960
7961*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7962articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7963bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7964
7965*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7966articles with the `*' command.
7967
7968*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7969
7970*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7971
7972 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7973
7974*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7975
7976*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7977`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7978
7979*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7980buffer.
7981
7982*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7983
7984*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7985
7986*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7987
7988 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7989
7990*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
7991
7992 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7993
7994*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
7995
7996*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7997
7998*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
7999
8000 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8001 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8002
8003*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8004refetching.
8005
8006 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8007
8008*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8009buffer to allow easier treatment.
8010
8011*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8012
8013*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8014
8015 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8016
8017*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8018articles.
8019
8020 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8021
8022*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8023
8024*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8025cited text to hide is now customizable.
8026
8027 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8028
8029*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8030
8031 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8032
8033*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8034
8035*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8036
8037The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8038in greater detail.
8039\f
8040* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8041
8042** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8043second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8044asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8045exists.
8046
8047** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8048as well as lists.
8049
8050** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8051of a given keymap.
8052
8053** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8054given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8055keymap or nil.
8056
8057** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8058an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8059name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8060menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8061equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8062alias.
8063\f
8064* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8065
8066** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8067
8068Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8069This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8070was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8071far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8072pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8073
8074For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8075you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8076`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8077
8078** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8079
8080The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8081do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8082It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8083much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8084chapter of the manual for details.
8085
8086However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8087customization variables take effect.
8088
8089** Marking with the mouse.
8090
8091When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8092highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8093using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8094
8095** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8096
8097*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8098
8099*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8100to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8101
8102*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8103in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8104you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8105application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8106applications, these problems are significant.
8107
8108If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8109likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8110However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8111will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8112other DOS application as a subprocess.
8113
8114Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8115You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8116
8117If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8118subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8119have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8120Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8121separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8122Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8123
8124** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8125
8126This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8127which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8128minibuffer contains.
8129
8130** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8131
8132The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8133It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8134It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8135affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8136
8137The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8138it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8139and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8140when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8141
8142** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8143enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8144
8145** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8146F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8147Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8148
8149If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8150menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8151something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8152the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8153
8154 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8155
8156** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8157to replace the characters it "deletes".
8158
8159** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8160
8161** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8162a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8163select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8164It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8165immediately after the selected one.
8166
8167This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8168made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8169
8170** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8171
8172Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8173directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8174If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8175Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8176recover-session.
8177
8178You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8179auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8180will not work.
8181
8182Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8183normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8184this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8185bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8186now that the bug is fixed.
8187
8188** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8189
8190There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8191when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8192Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8193which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8194
8195If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8196telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8197VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8198the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8199
8200** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8201Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8202is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8203
8204There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8205Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8206enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8207The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8208remain normal.
8209
8210** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8211header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8212
8213Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8214known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8215offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8216Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8217
8218Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8219of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8220a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8221name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8222documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8223`mail-directory-stream'.)
8224
8225** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8226skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8227characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8228with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8229
8230Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8231- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8232wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8233
8234The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8235less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8236headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8237Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8238Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8239fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8240to a limitation in font-lock).
8241
8242External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8243
8244** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8245buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8246buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8247this example:
8248
8249 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8250 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8251
8252** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8253
8254*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8255
8256*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8257
8258*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8259
8260*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8261entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8262will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8263isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8264(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8265The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8266
8267*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8268does the same job.
8269
8270*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8271"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8272
8273*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8274text.
8275
8276** Font Lock mode
8277
8278*** Global Font Lock mode
8279
8280Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8281new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8282font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8283turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8284on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8285
8286For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8287
8288 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8289
8290in your ~/.emacs.
8291
8292*** Local Refontification
8293
8294In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8295However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8296those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8297command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8298
8299In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8300(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8301current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8302above and below point.
8303
8304With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8305
8306** Follow mode
8307
8308Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8309buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8310side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8311they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8312split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8313follow-mode.
8314
8315M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8316
8317To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8318command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8319
8320** hide-show changes.
8321
8322The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8323to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8324normal hooks.
8325
8326** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8327The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8328
8329** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8330recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8331those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8332
8333** MSDOS Changes
8334
8335*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8336Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8337
8338*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8339and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8340
8341*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8342
8343*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8344pressing both mouse buttons.
8345
8346*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8347restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8348are:
8349
8350**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8351now works.
8352
8353**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8354
8355**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8356implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8357
8358**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8359
8360**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8361
8362**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8363
8364**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8365
8366**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8367\f
8368* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8369
8370** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8371tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8372remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8373this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8374behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8375
8376** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8377
8378The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8379not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8380need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8381be different.
8382
8383It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8384than `system-type'.
8385
8386See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8387
8388** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8389now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8390
8391** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8392that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8393
8394** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8395no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8396reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8397
8398The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8399to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8400like this:
8401
8402 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8403
8404SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8405It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8406becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8407
8408REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8409seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8410means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8411
8412*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8413up if too much time passes.
8414
8415 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8416
8417This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8418If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8419of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8420form in BODY.
8421
8422*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8423a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8424call looks like this:
8425
8426 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8427
8428SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8429runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8430timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8431ARGS.
8432
8433Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8434command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8435command.
8436
8437REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8438time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8439does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8440each time Emacs becomes idle.
8441
8442If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8443idle for SECS seconds.
8444
8445*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8446all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8447programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8448instead.
8449
8450*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8451there is no answer within a certain time.
8452
8453 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8454
8455asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8456within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8457Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8458
8459** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8460arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8461meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8462arguments in between are ignored.
8463
8464This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8465the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8466
8467** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8468/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8469/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8470site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8471version.
8472
8473It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8474version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8475for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8476has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8477and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8478problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8479
8480** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8481.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8482systems with limited file name syntax.
8483
8484Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8485convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8486for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8487completions.el:
8488
8489(defvar save-completions-file-name
8490 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8491 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8492
8493This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8494depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8495convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8496Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8497MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8498
8499** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8500rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8501minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8502
8503** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8504marker from its buffer position.
8505
8506** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8507Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8508The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8509
8510** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8511that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8512condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8513of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8514matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8515regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8516
8517This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8518errors that happen often during editing.
8519
8520** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8521into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8522puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8523
8524** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8525now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8526
8527** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8528a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8529name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8530to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8531and not get-buffer-window.
8532
8533** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8534calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8535being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8536
8537If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8538buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8539property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8540non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8541are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8542property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8543over and over for the same text.
8544
8545** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8546
8547*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8548in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8549
8550;; @(#) HEADER: text
8551;; $HEADER: text $
8552
8553in addition to the normal
8554
8555;; HEADER: text
8556
8557*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8558checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8559lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8560
8561
a933dad1 8562\f
3787e12e 8563* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8564
8565----------------------------------------------------------------------
8566Copyright information:
8567
424d8b44 8568Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8569
8570 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8571 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8572 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8573 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8574
8575 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8576 of this document, or of portions of it,
8577 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8578 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8579\f
8580Local variables:
8581mode: outline
8582paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8583end: